2008 Dodge LX/DX-49 Magnum SRT8 Owner - Dealer E

2008 Dodge LX/DX-49 Magnum SRT8 Owner - Dealer E
2008 Magnum SRT8
2008
OWNER’ S MANUAL
81-226-0822
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Magnum SRT8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefor.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2007 Chrysler LLC
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Modifications / Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
1
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer-oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed Index at the back of this manual contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INTRODUCTION
5
1
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures that could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do not
read this entire manual, you may miss important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is on the left
front corner of the instrument panel. The VIN is visible
from outside of the vehicle through the windshield. This
number also appears on the Automobile Information
Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the
vehicle registration, and the title.
VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove the VIN.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS / ALTERATIONS
1
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
䡵 Security Alarm System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .18
▫ FOB With Integrated Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Tip Start Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 Illuminated Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
䡵 Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ To Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
▫ Customer Sentry Key威 (FOB) Programming . . . .17
▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
䡵 Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . .23
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Transmitter Battery Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .45
䡵 Remote Starting System — If Equipped . . . . . . . .24
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
▫ Child Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
䡵 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped . . . . .47
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . .48
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Lock Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
11
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. This system
consists of a Fob with Integrated Key and a Wireless
Ignition Node (WIN) with integral ignition switch. You
can insert the double-sided integrated key into the ignition switch with either side up.
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
The Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) operates similarly to
an ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three
of which are detented and one spring-loaded. The detented positions are LOCK, ACC, and ON. The START
position is a spring-loaded momentary contact position.
When released from the START position, the switch
automatically returns to the detented ON position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Wireless Ignition Node (WIN)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
13
Fob with Integrated Key
The Fob with Integrated Key operates the ignition switch.
It also contains the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter and a valet key, which stores in the rear of the Fob.
2
The valet key allows for entry into the vehicle should the
battery in the vehicle or the Fob go dead. The valet key is
also for locking the glove box. You can keep the valet key
with you when valet parking.
To remove the valet key from the Fob, slide the mechanical latch at the top of the Fob sideways with your thumb
and then pull the key out of the Fob with your other
hand.
Valet Key Removal
NOTE: You can insert the double-sided valet key into
the lock cylinders with either side up.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Tip Start Feature
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running.
Ignition Key Removal
Place the shift lever in PARK. Turn the key to the LOCK
position and then remove the key.
NOTE: The power window switches, radio, power
sunroof (if equipped), and power outlets will remain
active for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories
Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
If you open the driver’s door and the key is in the
ignition, a chime will sound to remind you to remove the
key.
NOTE: The Key-In-Ignition reminder only sounds
when the ignition key is placed in the LOCK or ACC
position.
SENTRY KEY姞 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
The Sentry Key威 prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The system does not need to
be armed or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses the factory-mated Fob with Integrated
Key and Wireless Ignition Node (WIN) to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore, only fobs that are
programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and
15
operate the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in
two seconds if an invalid fob is used to start the engine.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON position, the
Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem
with the electronics. In addition, if the light begins to
flash after the bulb check, it indicates that someone used
an invalid fob to start the engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine being shut off after two
seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light turns on
during normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in
the electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not compatible with aftermarket remote starting systems. Use of
these systems may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
• Exxon/Mobil SpeedPass™, additional fobs, or any
other transponder-equipped components on the same
key chain will not cause a fault unless the additional
part is physically held against the fob being used to
start the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF
electronics will not cause interference with this system.
All of the fobs provided with your new vehicle have been
programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Key威 from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of fobs. Duplication of fobs may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by using the Customer Key Programming
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
17
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank fob to the vehicle electronics. A blank fob is one
that has never been programmed.
seconds, a chime will sound and the Vehicle Security
Alarm Indicator Light will begin to flash. Turn the
ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle fobs with you to the
authorized dealer.
3. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch to the ON position within 60
seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound and
the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will stop
flashing, turn on again for three seconds, and then turn
off.
Customer Sentry Key姞 (Fob) Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
new Sentry Keys威 to the system by performing the
following steps:
1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch to the ON position for at least
three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position and remove the first
key.
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Keyless Entry
Transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
2. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch to the ON position within 15 seconds. After 10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 System complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security Alarm system monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition switch for
unauthorized operation. If something triggers the alarm,
the system will prevent the vehicle from starting and
provide the following audible and visible signals: the
horn will pulse; the headlights will flash; the park lights
will flash; and the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light
in the instrument cluster will flash.
Rearming of the System
If something triggers the alarm and no action is taken to
disarm it, the system will turn the horn off after three
minutes, turn all of the visual signals off after 15 minutes,
and then the system will rearm itself.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Arm the System
Remove the key from the ignition switch and either press
a power door LOCK switch while the driver or passenger
door is open, or press the LOCK button on the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. After the last door is
closed, or if all doors are closed, the system will arm itself
in about 16 seconds. During that time, the Vehicle Security Alarm Indicator Light will flash. If it does not
illuminate, the system is not arming. In addition, if you
open a door during the arming period, the system will
cancel the arming process. If you wish to rearm the
system after closing the door, you must repeat one of the
previously-described arming sequences.
To Disarm the System
Either press the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter
or insert a valid ignition key into the ignition switch and
turn the key to the ON position.
19
If you open the liftgate after disarming the system, you
must use one of the previously described arming sequences if you wish to rearm the system after closing the
liftgate.
NOTE:
• The driver’s door key cylinder cannot arm or disarm
the system.
• When the system is armed, the interior power door
LOCK switches will not unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security Alarm system is designed to protect
your vehicle; however, you can create conditions where
the system will give you a false alarm. If one of the
previously-described arming sequences has occurred, the
system will arm regardless of whether you are in the
vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle and open a
door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the
system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the alarm system is armed and the battery becomes
disconnected the system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected. The exterior lights will flash, the
horn will sound, and the ignition will not start the
vehicle. If this occurs, disarm the system.
NOTE:
• None of the courtesy lights will operate if the dimmer
control is in the “defeat” position (extreme downward
position), unless the overhead map/reading lights are
turned on manually.
Tamper Alert
If something has triggered the system in your absence,
the horn will sound three times when you disarm the
system. Check the vehicle for tampering.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors or
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to about 35 ft
(11 m) using a hand-held radio transmitter. The transmitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
ILLUMINATED ENTRY SYSTEM
The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or open the
doors or liftgate.
The lights will fade to off after about 30 seconds or they
will immediately fade to off once the ignition switch is
turned ON from the LOCK position.
NOTE: Inserting the Fob with Integrated Key into the
ignition switch disables all buttons on that transmitter;
however, the buttons on the remaining transmitters will
continue to work. Driving at speeds 5 mph (8 km/h) and
above disables all transmitter buttons for all fobs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
21
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the transmitter. Refer to “Remote
Key Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Transmitter
To unlock the doors:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the transmitter
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five
seconds to unlock all doors. The turn signal lights will
flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. The illuminated
entry system will also turn on.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the transmitter.
This feature can be turned on or turned off. Refer to
“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock,” under ⬙Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the transmitter. The
time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Turn
Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in
Section 4.
To lock the doors:
Press and release the LOCK button on the transmitter to
lock all doors. The turn signal lights will flash and the
horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. Refer to “Sound Horn with
Remote Key Lock,” under “Personal Settings (Customer
Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the transmitter for at least one
second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the
headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse
on and off, and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by either pressing the PANIC button a
second time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 15 mph (24
km/h) or greater.
NOTE:
• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition
switch to the ACC or ON position while the Panic
Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights and
horn will remain on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the
vehicle when using the transmitter to turn off the
Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted
by the system.
23
1. Battery access is through a door located on the rear of
the Fob. Insert a small, flat blade screwdriver into the slot
and gently pry open the access door.
Programming Additional Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威, “Customer Sentry Key威 (Fob)
Programming.” (See page 17 for more information.)
If you do not have a programmed transmitter, contact
your authorized dealer for details.
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back
housing or the printed circuit board.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Battery Replacement
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. Reposition the access door panel over the battery
opening and snap into place.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
If your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter fails to
operate from a normal distance, check for these two
conditions:
1. A weak battery in the transmitter. The expected life of
the battery is a minimum of three years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to start the engine conveniently from outside the
vehicle while still maintaining security. The system has a
targeted range of 328 ft (100 m).
NOTE: The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How To Use Remote Start
All of the following conditions must be met before the
engine will remote start:
• Shift lever in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• HAZARD switch off
• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
• Battery at an acceptable charge level, and
• RKE PANIC button not pressed.
25
To Enter REMOTE START Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button
on the RKE transmitter twice, within five seconds. The parking lights will flash and the horn
will honk twice (if programmed). Then, the
engine will start and the vehicle will remain in the
REMOTE START mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
REMOTE START mode.
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if so equipped) are disabled when the vehicle
is in the REMOTE START mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15 minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position
before you can repeat the start sequence for a third
cycle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Exit REMOTE START Mode without Driving
the Vehicle
Allow the engine to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
To Exit REMOTE START Mode and Drive the
Vehicle
Before the end of the 15 minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle,
insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the switch
to the ON position.
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON position in
order to drive the vehicle.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the message “Insert Key/
Turn To Run” will flash in the EVIC until you insert
the key. Once inserted, the message “Turn To Run”
will flash in the EVIC until you turn the key to run.
To Turn Off the Engine While in REMOTE START
Mode
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time.
NOTE: To avoid inadvertent shut downs, the system
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START
button for two seconds after receiving a valid REMOTE
START request.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
To lock each door, push the door LOCK plunger on each
door trim panel downward. To unlock each door, pull the
door LOCK plunger on each door trim panel upward.
Door LOCK Plunger
27
If the door LOCK plunger is down when you shut the
door, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the key is
not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of
an accident, lock the vehicle doors before you
drive as well as when you park and leave the
vehicle.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition and lock your vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may cause
severe personal injuries and death.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for
a number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys
in the ignition. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Power Door Locks
A power door LOCK switch is on each front door trim
panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock the doors.
locks will not operate. This prevents you from accidentally locking the key in the vehicle. Removing the key or
closing the door will allow the locks to operate. If a door
is open, the key is in the ignition, and the ignition is in the
LOCK or ACC position, a chime will sound as a reminder
to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Automatic Door Locks feature is enabled
2. The transmission is in gear
3. All doors are closed
4. The throttle is pressed
Power Door LOCK Switch
If you press the power door LOCK switch while the key
is in the ignition, and any front door is open, the power
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h), and
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door LOCK switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
Automatic Door Locks Programming
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to “Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph
(24 km/h),” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance with local laws.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with
power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled
29
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h)
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK
4. The driver door is opened
5. The doors were not previously unlocked, and
6. The vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h).
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled. Refer to “Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
NOTE: Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature
in accordance with local laws.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Protection Door Lock
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with a Child
Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage the Child Protection Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the valet key (or alike) into the child
lock control and pull it upward.
Child Lock Control
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: When the Child Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using the
outside door handle even though the inside door lock is
in the unlocked position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
31
To Disengage the Child Protection Door Lock
System
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the valet key (or alike) into the child
lock control and pull it downward.
NOTE:
• After engaging the Child Protection Door Lock system, always test the door from the inside to make
certain it is in the desired position.
• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move
the door LOCK switch to the UNLOCK position, roll
down the window and open the door with the outside
door handle.
Child Lock Control
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
NOTE: After disengaging the Child Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the inside to
make certain it is in the desired position.
WINDOWS
Power Windows
The window controls on the driver’s door control all the
door windows.
Power WINDOW Switches
There are single window controls on each passenger door
trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows.
The window controls will operate only when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
33
To stop the window from going all the way down during
the AUTO-down operation, pull up on the switch briefly.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power WINDOW switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
AUTO-Down Feature
The driver door power WINDOW switch and some
model passenger door power WINDOW switches have
an AUTO-down feature. Press the WINDOW switch to
the second detent, release, and the window will go down
automatically.
To open the window part way, press the WINDOW
switch to the first detent and release it when you want
the window to stop.
The power WINDOW switches will remain active for up
to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Delay
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
AUTO-Up Feature with Anti–Pinch Protection — If
Equipped
Lift the WINDOW switch to the second detent, release,
and the window will go up automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up during the
AUTO-up operation, push down on the switch briefly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To close the window part way, lift the WINDOW switch
to the first detent and release it when you want the
window to stop.
The power WINDOW switches will remain active for up
to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Delay
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during autoclosure, it will reverse direction and then stop. Remove
the obstacle and use the WINDOW switch again to
close the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions may trigger
the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during autoclosure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly to the
first detent and hold to close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the window
is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the
window before closing.
Window LOCKOUT Switch
The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver’s door trim
panel allows you to disable the window controls on the
passenger doors. To disable the window controls, press
and release the window LOCKOUT button (setting it in
the down position). To enable the window controls, press
and release the window LOCKOUT button again (setting
it in the up position).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
1. Pull the WINDOW switch up to close window completely and continue to hold the switch up for an
additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the WINDOW switch down firmly to the second
detent to open the window completely and continue to
hold the switch down for an additional two seconds after
the window is fully open.
Window LOCKOUT Switch
Reset
Anytime the vehicle battery is disconnected or goes dead,
the AUTO-up function will be disabled. To reactivate the
auto-up feature, perform the following steps after vehicle
power is restored:
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
The liftgate can be unlocked or locked by the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or by activating the
power door lock switches located on the front doors.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed. To
open the liftgate, depress the liftgate release switch
located in the exterior handle and pull the liftgate open
with one fluid motion.
Liftgate Release Switch
The liftgate will not open manually if the gear selector is
moved out of the PARK position or the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If a power malfunction occurs, you can use the
emergency liftgate latch release to open the liftgate. The
emergency liftgate latch release is located behind a
snap-in cover on the liftgate trim panel.
37
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Emergency Liftgate Latch Release Location
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, the
front airbags for both the driver and front passenger, the
optional supplemental side curtain airbags for the driver
and passengers seated next to a window, and the optional
supplemental front seat mounted side airbags. If you will
be carrying children too small for adult-size belts, your
seat belts also can be used to hold infant and child
restraint systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or impacts. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. However, in a collision, the belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
39
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that
is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat
belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat belts are
designed to go around the large bones of your body. These
are the strongest parts of your body and can take the forces
of a collision best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make your
injuries in a collision much worse. You might suffer internal
injuries, or you could even slide out of part of the belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat belt safely and to
keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single seat belt.
People belted together can crash into one another in an
accident, hurting one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one person, no
matter what their size.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the front seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of your seat.
Grasp the latch plate and pull out the belt. Slide the latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary to make the belt
go around your lap.
Pulling Out Lap/Shoulder Belt
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
41
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too high
on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop, you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
Connecting Latch Plate To Buckle
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle in
a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt worn
under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as
strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder
so that your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit
your head in a collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used
together.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
a bit on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too
tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a
collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t be
at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision,
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it to
your authorized dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Removing Slack From Belt
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
43
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock-Out
This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
the 60% rear seatback is not fully latched. This prevents
someone from wearing the rear center lap/shoulder belt
when the rear seatback is not fully latched.
NOTE:
• If the rear center lap/shoulder belt cannot be pulled
out, check that the rear seatback is fully latched.
• If the rear seatback is properly latched and the rear
center lap/shoulder belt still cannot be pulled out, the
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be
activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the
belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be
able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing
has been returned back into the retractor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lock-out feature to ensure that the rear seatback is in
the fully upright and locked position when occupied.
If the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked
and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled
out of the retractor, the vehicle should immediately
be taken to your dealer for service. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious or fatal injury.
NOTE: When the shoulder belt is adjusted to the full
downward position, it will not be at the bottom of the slot
in the Trim Panel. This is normal and the intended lowest
position.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the shoulder belt
can be adjusted upward or downward to position the belt
away from your neck. Push and fully depress the button
above the webbing to release the anchorage, then move it
up or down to the position that fits you best.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up and down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
45
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove any slack from the seat belts in the event of a
collision. These devices improve the performance of the
seat belt system by assuring that the belt is tight around
the occupant in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size
occupants, including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). (Refer to information on Airbags in this section). Like the front airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision that is severe
enough to deploy the airbags and pretensioners, both
must be replaced.
Enhanced Seat Belt Reminder System (BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within 60
seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed is
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Warning
System (BeltAlert威) will alert the driver to buckle the seat
belt. The driver should also instruct all other occupants to
buckle their seat belts. Once the warning is triggered, the
BeltAlert威 will continue to chime and flash the Seat Belt
Reminder Light for 96 seconds or until the driver’s seat
belt is buckled. The BeltAlert威 will be reactivated if the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more than 10 seconds
and the vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
BeltAlert威 Programming
The BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your
authorized dealer or by performing the following steps:
NOTE: DaimlerChrysler does not recommend deactivating the BeltAlert威.
1. With all doors closed, and the ignition switch in any
position except ON or START, buckle the driver’s seat
belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
start the engine. Wait for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to
turn off and then proceed to the next step.
NOTE: You must perform the following steps within 60
seconds of turning the ignition switch to the ON position.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s
seat belt at least three times within 10 seconds, ending
with the seat belt buckled.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling the seat belt and turn off while
re-buckling the seat belt. It may be necessary to retract
the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
The BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: When the BeltAlert威 is deactivated, the Seat Belt
Reminder Light will continue to illuminate as long as the
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled.
Automatic Locking Mode — If Equipped
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically prelocked. However, the belt will still retract to remove slack
in the shoulder belt. Use The Automatic Locking mode
any time a child safety seat is installed in a seating
47
position that has a seat belt with this feature. Seat belts
that have the Automatic Locking mode feature have a
distinctive label on the webbing. Children 12 years old
and younger should be properly restrained in the rear
seat whenever possible.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
here a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder belt and
allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic
Locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belts and Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if so
equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
long enough. When it is not required, remove the extender and store it.
WARNING!
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can
increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use
when the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn
low and snug and in the recommended seating positions. Remove and store the extender when not
needed.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
This vehicle has front airbags for both the driver and
front passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s airbag is mounted in the center of
the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the
airbag covers.
49
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity.
Front Airbag Components
1 — Airbags
2 — Knee Bolsters
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the front airbag
covers or attempt to open them. You may damage
the airbags and you could be injured because the
airbags are no longer functional. These protective
covers for the airbag cushions are designed to
open only when the airbags are inflating.
If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain
airbags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizens band radios
etc.
This vehicle may also be equipped with supplemental
side curtain airbags to protect the driver and passengers
sitting next to a window and/or supplemental front seat
mounted side airbags.
Window Airbag
NOTE: Airbag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open to allow airbag deployment.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat
mounted side airbags, they are marked with an SRS label
sewn into the outboard side of the seat.
51
WARNING!
• If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat
mounted side airbags, do not use accessory seat covers or
place objects between you and the seat airbags; the performance could be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental front seat
mounted side airbags, do not attach cupholders or any other
objects on or around the door. The inflating seat airbag could
drive the object into occupants, causing serious injury.
• If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain
airbags, do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the location of the side curtain airbag. The area
where the side curtain airbag is located should remain free
from any obstructions.
• If your vehicle is equipped with supplemental side curtain
airbags, do not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your vehicle. Do
not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts
or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Do not use a clothing bar mounted to the coat
hooks in this vehicle. A clothing bar will impede the
proper performance of the curtain airbags.
Along with the seat belts, front airbags work with the
instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side curtain
and seat airbags also work with seat belts to improve
occupant protection.
While the seat belts are designed to protect you in many
types of collisions, the front airbags will deploy in
moderate to severe frontal collisions. For vehicles so
equipped, the supplemental side curtain airbag and front
seat mounted side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle
will also trigger in moderate to severe side collisions.
However, even in collisions where the airbags deploy,
you need the seat belts to keep you in the correct position
for the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize
the risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and younger should ride buckled up in the rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
front airbag. An airbag deployment could cause
severe injury or death to infants in that position.
2. Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicle
seat belt properly should be secured in the rear seat in
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats. (Refer to
information on Child Restraint in this section.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Older children who do not use child restraints or
belt-positioning booster seats should ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow children to slide the
shoulder belt behind them or under their arm.
4. If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint. (Refer to information on Child Restraint in this
section.)
5. You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
53
7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved
back as far as practical to allow the airbags time to inflate.
8. If your vehicle has supplemental side curtain airbags
and/or supplemental front seat mounted side airbags, do
not lean against the door, as airbags will inflate forcefully
into the space between you and the door.
9. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact the
Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided in the ⬙If
You Need Customer Assistance⬙ section.
6. All occupants should use their seat belts properly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag System Components
The airbag system consists of the following:
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
airbags.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during airbag deployment could cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit back,
comfortably extending your arms to reach the
steering wheel or instrument panel.
• Front Passenger Airbag
• If the vehicle has supplemental side curtain airbags and/or supplemental front seat mounted side
airbags, they also need room to inflate. Do not lean
against the door or window. Sit upright in the
center of the seat.
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (if equipped)
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Airbag
• Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags above side windows (if equipped)
• Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags (if
equipped)
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Seat Belt Reminder Light
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Front Acceleration Sensors
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
How the Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. The ORC will not
detect rollover.
• For vehicles so equipped, the ORC also determines if a
side impact is severe enough to deploy the supplemental side curtain airbag and/or supplemental front
seat mounted side airbag, as required for each type of
impact.
55
• The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON positions. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and they will
not inflate.
• The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for six to eight
seconds as a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the
Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
again after initial start-up.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
• The Driver and Front Passenger Airbag/Inflator
Units are located in the center of the steering wheel
and the passenger side of the instrument panel. When
the ORC detects a collision requiring the airbags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of nontoxic
gas is generated to inflate the front airbags. Different
airbag inflation rates may be possible based on collision severity. The steering wheel hub trim cover and
the upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the bags inflate to
their full size. The bags fully inflate in about 50 to 70
ms. This is about half of the time that it takes to blink
your eyes. The bags then quickly deflate while helping
to restrain the driver and front passenger. The driver’s
front airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the
sides of the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is
vented through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In
this way, the airbags do not interfere with your control
of the vehicle.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of
the driver and the front passenger, and position everyone for the best interaction with the front airbag.
• The Supplemental Side Impact SRS Side Curtain
Airbags are designed to activate only in certain side
collisions. When the ORC (with side impact option)
detects a collision requiring the side curtain airbag to
inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the side curtain airbag. The inflating side curtain airbag pushes the outside edge of the headliner
out of the way and covers the window. The airbag
inflates in about 30 ms (about one-quarter of the time
that it takes to blink your eyes) with enough force to
injure you if you are not belted and seated properly, or
if items are positioned in the area where the side
curtain airbag inflates. This especially applies to children. The side curtain airbag is only about 3-1/2 in (9
cm) thick when it is inflated.
• The Supplemental Front Seat Mounted Side Airbags
are designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
When the ORC (with side impact option) detects a
collision requiring the front seat mounted side airbag
to inflate, it signals the inflators on the crash side of the
vehicle. A quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front seat mounted side airbag. The inflating front seat mounted side airbag pushes through the
57
seam in the seat’s trim cover and opens into the space
between the occupant and the door. The airbag inflates
at a very high speed and with enough force to injure
you if you are not belted and seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the front seat
mounted side airbag inflates. This especially applies to
children.
The following requirements must be strictly adhered
to:
• Do not make any modifications to the front seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover in any
way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat covers
not designated for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover specified
for the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not replace the seat cover with an aftermarket
seat cover.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover other than those
approved by DaimlerChrysler/Mopar威.
• At no time should any supplemental restraint system (SRS) component or SRS-related component or
fastener be modified or replaced with any part
except
those
which
are
approved
by
DaimlerChrysler/Mopar威.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front seat assembly, its related components, or
seat cover may inadvertently change the airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This could result
in death or serious injury to the driver or front seat
passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A
modified vehicle may not comply with required
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).
If a Deployment Occurs
The airbag system is designed to deploy when the ORC
detects a moderate to severe collision to help restrain the
driver and front passenger and then to immediately
deflate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision that deploys the airbags, any or
all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
• As the airbags deflate, you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
59
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have been deployed. If you are involved in
another collision, the airbags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another collision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
with the vehicle stopped, and the vehicle communication
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced
Accident Response System performs the following functions:
• Cuts off fuel to the engine.
• Flashes hazard lights.
• Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlocks the doors automatically.
NOTE: The interior lights can only be deactivated if the
key is removed from the ignition switch or the vehicle is
driven.
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers
during the six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned ON.
61
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see the following list) in an event data recorder
prior to the moment of airbag deployment, or near
deployment, and up to a quarter second of high-speed
deceleration data during and/or after airbag deployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag deploys,
or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
• The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight
second interval.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by DaimlerChrysler Corporation and others to learn
more about the possible causes of crashes and associated
injuries in order to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition to crash investigations initiated by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation, such investigations may
be requested by customers, insurance carriers, government officials, and professional crash researchers, such as
those associated with universities, and with hospital and
insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
DaimlerChrysler Corporation (regardless of initiative),
the company or its designated representative will first
obtain permission of the appropriate custodial entity for
the vehicle (usually the vehicle owner or lessee) before
accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to
download data by a court with legal jurisdiction (i.e.,
pursuant to a warrant). A copy of the data will be
provided to the custodial entity upon request. General
data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes
may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash
databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of a potentially sensitive
nature, such as would identify a particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential
data will not be disclosed by DaimlerChrysler
Corporation to any third party except when:
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved.
2. Used in defense of litigation
DaimlerChrysler Corporation product.
involving
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant.
4. Otherwise required by law.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
63
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Cruise control status
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning light status for
electronically-controlled safety systems, including the
airbag system
• Traction/stability control status
• Airbag disable light status (if equipped)
Child Restraint
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Impact acceleration and angle
• Seat belt status
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System status (if equipped)
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Transmission gear selection
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants and Child Restraints
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child.
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing, infant
carriers and convertible child seats.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old. Both types of child restraints are
held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the
LATCH child restraint anchorage system. Refer to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
“LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)” in this section.
• Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with the front passenger
airbag unless the airbag is turned off. An airbag
deployment could cause severe injury or death to
infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who are
older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children
who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who are older
than one year. These child seats are also held in the
vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH child
restraint anchorage system. Refer to “LATCH — Child
Seat Anchorage System (Lower Anchors and Tether for
CHildren)” in this section.
65
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing
more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small to fit
the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child cannot sit
with knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while the
child’s back is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and beltpositioning booster seat are held in the vehicle by the
lap/shoulder belt.
Children too Large for Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
WARNING!
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
to
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag, which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
67
Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seatbacks and
cause serious personal injury.
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
Your vehicle’s rear seat is equipped with the child
restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH
system provides for the installation of the child restraint
without using the vehicle’s seat belts, instead securing
the child restraint using lower anchorages and upper
tether straps from the child restraint to the vehicle
structure.
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems are now available. However, because the lower anchorages are to be
introduced over a period of years, child restraint systems
having attachments for those anchorages will continue to
have features for installation using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Child restraints having tether straps and hooks for
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5connection to the top tether anchorages have been available for some time. For some older child restraints, many
child restraint manufacturers offer add-on tether strap
kits or retro-fit kits. You are urged to take advantage of all
the available attachments provided with your child restraint in any vehicle.
All three rear-seating positions have lower anchorages
that are capable of accommodating LATCH-compatible
child seats. You should NEVER install LATCHcompatible child seats so that two seats share a common
lower anchorage. If installing child seats in adjacent
rear-seating positions, or if your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, install the restraints using the vehicle’s seat belts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
LATCH Anchorages
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Installing the LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
System
We urge you to follow the manufacturer’s directions
carefully when installing your child restraint. Not all
child restraint systems will be installed as described here.
Again, carefully follow the installation instructions that
are provided with the child restraint system.
The rear seat lower anchorages are round bars
located at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback and are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the intersection of the seatback and seat cushion
surfaces.
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages located
behind each rear seatback.
Many, but not all restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
69
connector for attachment to the lower anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension in the strap. Forwardfacing toddler restraints and some rear-facing infant
restraints will also be equipped with a tether strap, a
hook for attachment to the tether strap anchorage and a
means of adjusting the tension of the strap.
You will first loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and
on the tether strap so that you can more easily attach the
hooks or connectors to the vehicle anchorages. Next,
attach the lower hooks or connectors over the top of the
seatcover material. Then rotate the tether anchorage
cover directly behind the seat where you are placing the
child restraint and attach the tether strap to the anchorage, being careful to route the tether strap to provide the
most direct path between the anchor and the child
restraint. Finally, tighten all three straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into the seat,
removing slack in the straps according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
• When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts not
being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through
the child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This
should stow the seat belt out of the reach of an
inquisitive child. Remind all children in the vehicle
that the seat belts are not toys and should not be
played with, and never leave your child unattended in
the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of an infant or
child restraint. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly
when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Belt
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either cinching latch plates or automatic locking retractors, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
Pulling up on the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder
belt will tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
keep the belt tight; however, any seat belt system will
loosen with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull
it tight if necessary.
Seat belts with an automatic locking retractor have a
distinctive label on the seat belt webbing. The seat belt
must be in the Automatic Locking mode in order to
enable a child restraint to be tightly installed. (Refer to
“Automatic Locking Mode” in this section). A locking
clip should not be necessary once the automatic locking
feature is enabled. Position the shoulder and lap belt on
the child restraint. The automatic locking retractor is
activated by first attaching the child seat, then pulling all
of the webbing out of the retractor, then allowing the
webbing to retract back into the retractor. Tighten webbing. To release, simply unbuckle the seat belt by depressing the button, allowing the webbing to retract into
the retractor.
71
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path opening
on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate from the
buckle and twist the short buckle end belt several times
to shorten it. Insert the latch plate into the buckle with the
release button facing out.
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, you may need
to do something more. Disconnect the latch plate from
the buckle, turn the buckle around, and insert the latch
plate into the buckle again. If you still can’t make the
child restraint secure, try a different seating position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To attach a child restraint tether strap:
1. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat.
2. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to the
tether anchor and remove slack in the tether strap
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
NOTE: Ensure that the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack in
the strap.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor positions directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Tether Strap Mounting
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the drivetrain
(engine, transmission, and rear axle) in your new vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 500 mi (800 km). After
the initial 60 mi (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80
or 90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
However, wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can
be detrimental and should be avoided.
73
The engine oil, transmission fluid, and axle lubricant
installed at the factory is high-quality and energyconserving. Oil, fluid, and lubricant changes should be
consistent with anticipated climate and conditions under
which vehicle operations will occur. The recommended
viscosity and quality grades is shown in Section 7.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
in the engine or damage may result.
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
should be considered as a normal part of the break-in and
not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Lock Your Vehicle
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended, even in your
own driveway or garage. Try to park your vehicle in a
well-lit area and never invite theft by leaving articles of
value exposed.
Exhaust Gas
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
75
WARNING!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO) which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
(CO), follow the safety tips below.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the
climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
76
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
77
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
▫ Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Driver’s-Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Power Remote Control Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . .85
▫ Heated Remote Control Mirrors —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . .86
䡵 Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ UConnect威 System Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
80
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Things You Should Know About Your UConnect威
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
䡵 Voice Recognition System (VR) — If Equipped . . 113
▫ Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . . 113
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
䡵 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . . 127
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . . 129
▫ Power Reclining Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
▫ Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights . . . . . 131
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
81
▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With
Auto Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
䡵 Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
䡵 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . 136
䡵 Adjustable Pedals — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 137
䡵 Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Electronic Speed Control Operation . . . . . . . . 138
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
▫ Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . . 147
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
82
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Reprogramming A Single
HomeLink威 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
▫ Opening Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Closing Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Venting Sunroof - Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Sunroof Fully Closed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
▫ Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off . . . . . . . 155
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Front Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Rear Seat Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
䡵 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Cargo Management System — If Equipped . . . 158
䡵 Roof Luggage Rack — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 165
䡵 Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
83
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror.
A light next to the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated.
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirror(s)
to center on the adjacent lane of traffic and a slight
overlap of the view obtained from the inside mirror.
NOTE: The passenger-side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and especially of the
lane next to your vehicle.
WARNING!
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger-side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger-side convex mirror could cause you to
collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your
inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a
vehicle seen in the passenger-side convex mirror.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Exterior Mirrors Folding Feature — If Equipped
Some models have exterior mirrors that are hinged. The
hinge allows the mirror to pivot forward and rearward to
resist damage. The hinge has three detent positions, full
forward, full rearward, and normal.
85
After selecting a mirror, move the knob in the same
direction you want the mirror to move. Use the center off
position to guard against accidentally moving a mirror
position.
3
Driver’s-Side Outside Mirror Auto Dimmer — If
Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for annoying headlight
glare from vehicles behind you. You can turn this feature
on or off by pressing the button at the base of the inside
rearview mirror.
Power Remote Control Mirrors
The power MIRROR switch is located on the driver’s
door trim panel next to the power door LOCK switch. A
rotary knob selects the left mirror, right mirror, or off
position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Power Mirror Control
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Remote Control Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This feature
is activated whenever you turn on the Electric Rear
Window Defroster.
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor downward and swing the
mirror cover upward. The light turns on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
87
HANDS-FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect姞) —
IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: For UConnect威 customer support, visit the
following websites:
NOTE: The sales code RER radio contains an integrated Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威) system. Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
UConnect威 system operating instructions for this radio.
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
UConnect威 is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. UConnect威 allows you to dial a
phone number with your cellular phone using simple
voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or ⬙Dial”
ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using the
UConnect威 system.
• or call 1–877–855–8400
NOTE: The UConnect威 system requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙ Version 0.96 or higher. See the UConnect威 website for
supported phones.
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
UConnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The UConnect威 phonebook enables you to store up to 32
names, with four numbers per name. Each language has
a separate 32-name phonebook accessible only in that
language. This system is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free profile” cellular phone. UConnect威 features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so UConnect威 works
no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be it your
purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone is
turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
UConnect威 system. The UConnect威 system allows up to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages (as equipped).
PHONE Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
that will enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with radio.
The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The UConnect威 system can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
UConnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellular phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset
Profile) you may not be able to use any UConnect威
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
The UConnect威 system is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the UConnect威 system
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect威 system such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the UConnect威
system and to navigate through the UConnect威 menu
structure. Voice commands are required after most
UConnect威 system prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
89
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
UConnect威 system works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The UConnect威 system will play all the options
at any prompt if you ask for help.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the UConnect威 system from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All UConnect威 system sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) UConnect威 System to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your UConnect威 system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone owner’s manual. The
UConnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
The following are general phone to UConnect威 system
pairing instructions:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN number. You will not need to remember
this PIN number after the initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect威 system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
91
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, with 1 being the highest
priority. You can pair up to seven cellular phones to
your UConnect威 system. However, at any given time,
only one cellular phone can be in use, connected to
your UConnect威 system. The priority allows the
UConnect威 system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if priority 3 and priority 5
phones are present in the vehicle, the UConnect威
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time (refer to ⬙Advanced Phone
Connectivity⬙ in this section).
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
Dial by Saying a Number
Call by Saying a Name
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901.⬙ The phone
number that you enter must be of valid length and
combination. Based on the country in which the vehicle was purchased, the UConnect威 system limits the
user from dialing an invalid combination of numbers.
For example, in the U.S., 234-567-890 is nine digits
long, which is not a valid U.S. phone number - the
closest valid phone number has 10 digits.
• The UConnect威 system will confirm the phone number and then dial. The number will appear in the
display of certain radios.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the UConnect威 phonebook.
To learn how to store a name in the phonebook, refer
to ⬙Add Names to Your UConnect威 Phonebook,⬙ in
this section.
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will confirm the name and
then dial the corresponding phone number, which
may appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect威 system will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language.
Phonebook Download
UConnect威 allows the user to download entries from
their phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
PHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” The
system prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
NOTE:
• The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
93
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the UConnect威 system, and then send the address
book entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone
owner’s manual for specific instructions on how to
drop the Bluetooth威 connection.
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
Edit Entries in the UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Editing names in the phonebook is recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
mobile, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
Delete Entries in the UConnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the “Voice Recognition” button
while the UConnect威 system is playing the desired
entry and say ⬙Delete.⬙
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After you enter the name, the UConnect威 system will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, mobile, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
Delete All Entries in the UConnect威 Phonebook
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
95
List All Names in the UConnect威 Phonebook
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the “Voice
Recognition” button during the playing of the desired
name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
• The UConnect威 system will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
UConnect威 system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect威 system. Check with
your cellular service provider for the features that you
have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect威 system will interrupt the vehicle audio system, if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the
call. Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject
the call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your cell
phone. Press the PHONE button to place the current call
on hold and answer the incoming call.
NOTE: The UConnect威 system compatible phones in
the market today do not support rejecting an incoming
call when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user
can only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the “Voice Recognition” button and say ⬙Dial⬙ or
⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress. To go back to the first call, refer
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙ in this section. To combine
two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
97
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the “Voice Recognition” button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second
Call While Current Call in Progress.⬙ After the second call
has established, press and hold the PHONE button until
you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls have
been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Redial
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the UConnect威 system and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
• The UConnect威 system will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnect威 system for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the UConnect威 system to the mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
UConnect威 system.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
mobile phone after the ignition key is switched to OFF.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
UConnect威 system after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
UConnect姞 System Features
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the UConnect威 system either until the call
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect威 system is
using:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
99
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
(English, Espanol, or Francais, if so equipped).
If the phone is not reachable and the UConnect威 system
is operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
language selection.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every UConnect威 language change operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is
usable. The paired phone name is not language-specific
and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the UConnect威 system will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is only supported in the U.S.
NOTE: The emergency number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S.
and Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service and
area.
The UConnect威 system does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the cell
phone directly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
UConnect威 system to allow use of this vehicle feature in
emergency situations, when the cell phone has network
coverage and stays paired to the UConnect威 system.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE: The Towing Assistance number dialed is based
on the country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454
for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico
City in Mexico).
Please refer to the 24-Hour “Towing Assistance” coverage details in the Warranty Information Booklet and on
the 24–Hour Towing Assistance Card.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the UConnect威 system.
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your UConnect威 system to access a voice
mail system or an automated service, such as a paging
service or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some
instances, that may be too quick for use of the UConnect威
system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When calling a number with your UConnect威 system
that normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone
sequence on your cellular phone keypad, you can press
the “Voice Recognition” button and say the sequence you
wish to enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example,
if required to enter your PIN number followed with a
pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you can press the “Voice Recognition”
button and say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or
sequence of numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be
used for navigating through an automated customer
service center menu structure, and to leave a number on
a pager.
You can also send stored UConnect威 phonebook entries
as tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The UConnect威 system will then
101
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations; this is normal.
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧ,⬙ you could press the “Voice Recognition” button and
say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the UConnect威 system will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The UConnect威 system will
play the current confirmation prompt status and you
will be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cell phone, the UConnect威 system will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using UConnect威. The status is given for roaming, network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect威 system (while dialing via the cell phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The UConnect威 system will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the
dial ring to the UConnect威 system to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute Off)
When you mute the UConnect威 system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect威 system:
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
In order to un-mute the UConnect威 system:
103
from your UConnect威 paired cellular phone to the
UConnect威 system or vice versa, press the “Voice Recognition” button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
UConnect威 System and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a UConnect威 paired cellular phone
and the UConnect威 system, follow the instructions described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The UConnect威 system allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the UConnect威 system
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The UConnect威 system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from the highest to
the lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired
phone being announced, press the “Voice Recognition” button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the
next two sections for an alternate way to “select” or
“delete” a paired phone.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the UConnect威 system.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
UConnect威 system will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m) the vehicle.
Delete UConnect威 Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
• You can also press the “Voice Recognition” button at
any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Things You Should Know About Your UConnect姞
System
UConnect威 Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “UConnect威 Tutorial.”
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
system Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
From outside the UConnect威 mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
• Press and hold the “Voice Recognition” button for five
seconds until the session begins, or,
• Press the “Voice Recognition” button and say the
⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command.
105
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect威 system. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
To restore the voice recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
Voice Recognition (VR)
• For best performance, adjust the rear view mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
• Performance is maximized under:
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the UConnect威 phonebook.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• The UConnect威 phonebook nametag recognition rate
is optimized for the person who stored the name in the
phonebook.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
107
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
Far End Audio Performance
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Audio quality is maximized under:
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the UConnect威 system. When this happens, the connection can generally be re-established by switching the
phone off/on. Your cell phone is recommended to remain
in Bluetooth威 ON mode.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either ON
or ACC position, or after a language change, you must
wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the drivers seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the UConnect威 system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
3
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
111
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
UConnect威 Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) — IF
EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation
This Voice Recognition System allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
113
NOTE: In a stressful situation, take care to speak into
the Voice Interface System as calmly and normally as
possible. The ability of the Voice Interface System to
recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
When you press the VR hard-key, you will hear a beep.
The beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR hard-key, listen for the beep, and
say your command.
Pressing the VR hard-key while the system is speaking is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted
and you can add or change commands. This will become
helpful once you start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words CANCEL,
HELP, or MAIN MENU.
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR hard-key
and say HELP or MAIN MENU.
Commands
The Voice Recognition System understands two types of
commands. Global commands are available at all times.
Local commands are available if the supported radio
mode is active.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Changing the Volume
115
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave - if equipped)
To switch to the AM band say AM or RADIO AM. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key.
2. Say a command (e.g., HELP).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the voice recognition
system is speaking. Please note the volume setting for VR
is different then the audio system.
• FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR hard-key. You may
say MAIN MENU to switch to the main menu.
• RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
• NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
• PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
• RADIO (to switch to the radio mode)
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band say FM or RADIO FM. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• DISC (to switch to the disc mode)
• FREQUENCY (to change the frequency)
• MEMO (to switch to the memo recorder)
• NEXT STATION (to select the next station)
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• PREVIOUS STATION (to select the previous station)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode say DISC. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode say SAT or SATELLITE
RADIO. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• CHANNEL NUMBER (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
• NEXT CHANNEL (to select the next channel)
• PREVIOUS CHANNEL (to select the previous channel)
• LIST CHANNEL (to hear a list of available channels)
• SELECT NAME (to say the name of a channel)
• RADIO MENU (to switch to the radio menu)
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
• TRACK (#) (to change the track)
• NEXT TRACK (to play the next track)
• PREVIOUS TRACK (to play the previous track)
• MAIN MENU (to switch to the main menu)
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode say MEMO. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• NEW MEMO (to record a new memo) — During the
recording you may press the VR hard-key to stop
recording. You continue by saying one of the following
commands:
− SAVE (to save the memo)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
− CONTINUE (to continue recording)
− DELETE (to delete the recording)
• PLAY MEMOS (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the VR hardkey to stop playing memos. You continue by saying
one of the following commands:
− REPEAT (to repeat a memo)
− NEXT (to play the next memo)
117
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the UConnect威
system Voice Training feature may be used.
1. Press the VR hard-key, speak “System Setup” and once
you are in that menu then speak “Voice Training.” This
will train your own voice to the system and will improve
recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
UConnect威 System. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
− PREVIOUS (to play the previous memo)
− DELETE (to delete a memo)
• DELETE ALL (to delete all memos)
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR
hard-key first and wait for the beep, before speaking the
“barge in” commands.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
SEATS
Power Seats
The power SEAT switch is on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use this switch to move the driver’s
seat up or down, forward or rearward, or to tilt the seat.
The passenger’s seat will move up or down, forward or
rearward.
Power SEAT Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat could
cause you to lose control. The seat belt might not be
properly adjusted and you could be injured. Adjust
the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
119
Power Reclining Seats
The recliner control is located on the outboard side of the
seat.
3
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under a power seat as it may
cause damage to the seat controls.
Power Seat RECLINE Switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only when the vehicle is parked.
Lumbar Support
This feature allows you to increase or decrease the
amount of lumbar support. Turn the control lever forward to increase and rearward to decrease the desired
amount of lumbar support.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Lumbar Support Control Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Adjust the restraint so
that the upper edge is as high as practical. To raise it, pull
upward on the head restraint. To lower it, depress the
button on the post guide and push downward on the
head restraint.
3
Adjustable Head Restraint
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
121
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats
Heated seats provide comfort and warmth on cold days
and can help soothe sore muscles and backs. The heaters
provide the same heat level for both cushion and back.
The driver seat and front passenger seat are heated.
The controls for each heater are located near the bottom
center of the instrument panel. After turning on the
ignition, you can choose from High, Off, or Low heat
settings. Amber LEDs in the top portion of each switch
indicate the level of heat in use. Two LEDs will illuminate
for high, one for low, and none for off.
Front HEATED SEAT Switch
Press the switch once to select high level heating. Press
the switch a second time to select low level heating. Press
the switch a third time to shut OFF the heating elements.
If high level heating is selected, the system will automatically switch to the low level after 30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the number of illuminated
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change.
Operation on the low setting also turns off automatically
after 30 minutes.
123
Folding Rear Seat
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
3
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns even
at low temperatures, especially if used for long
periods.
Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat.
Folding Rear Seats
The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an
additional storage area. Pull on the loops shown in the
illustration to fold down either or both seatbacks. These
loops can be tucked away when not in use.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When the seatback is folded to the upright position, make
sure it is latched by strongly pulling on the top of the
seatback above the seat strap.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood. First, pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
WARNING!
• Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position, the seat will not provide the proper
stability for child seats and/or passengers. An
improperly latched seat could cause serious injury.
• The cargo area in the rear of the vehicle (with the
rear seatbacks in the locked-up or folded down
position) should not be used as a play area by
children when the vehicle is in motion. They could
be seriously injured in an accident. Children
should be seated and using the proper restraint
system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Hood Release Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Next, move to the outside of the vehicle and push the
safety catch to the left. The safety catch is located under
the center front edge of the hood.
125
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 6
in (15 cm), and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched, it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
Hood Safety Catch
Use the hood prop rod (if equipped) to secure the hood in
the open position.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The HEADLIGHT switch is located on the left
side of the instrument panel. This switch controls
the operation of the headlights, parking lights,
instrument panel lights, instrument panel light dimming,
interior lights, and fog lights.
HEADLIGHT Switch
Rotate the HEADLIGHT switch clockwise to the first
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Turn it to the second detent for headlight, park
light, and instrument panel light operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights ON or
OFF according to ambient light levels. To turn the system
ON, rotate the HEADLIGHT switch counterclockwise to
the AUTO (A) position. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This means the
headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds after you turn
the ignition switch OFF. To turn the automatic system
OFF, move the HEADLIGHT switch out of the AUTO (A)
position.
3
HEADLIGHT Switch
NOTE: The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON
if the HEADLIGHT switch is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the
wipers are turned OFF if they were turned ON by this
feature.
The Headlights On with Wipers feature can be enabled or
disabled. Refer to ”Headlights On with Wipers,” under
“Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in Section
4.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight illumination
for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your
vehicle in an unlit area.
To activate the delay feature, turn OFF the ignition switch
while the headlights are still on. Then, turn OFF the
headlights within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the HEADLIGHT switch is turned OFF.
If you turn the headlights, park lights, or ignition switch
ON again, the system will cancel the delay.
If you turn the headlights OFF before the ignition, they
will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE: The lights must be turned OFF within 45 seconds of turning the ignition OFF to activate this feature.
The Headlight delay time is programmable. Refer to
“Delay Turning Headlights Off,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is ON, the
headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The
HEADLIGHT switch must be used for normal nighttime
driving.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
129
An indicator light in the instrument cluster illuminates
when the fog lights are turned ON.
NOTE: The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the
high beam headlights will turn off the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn
signals, headlight beam selection, and passing lights. The
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
Fog Lights
The front FOG LIGHT switch is on the HEADLIGHT switch below the dimmer control. To activate the front fog lights, turn ON the parking
lights or the low beam headlights and press the FOG
LIGHT switch.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
by moving the lever partially up or down without
moving beyond the detent. Releasing the lever at the
detent will provide three flashes.
If either indicator has a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to light
when the lever is moved, see your authorized dealer for
service.
NOTE: A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
Multifunction Lever
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the
corresponding turn signal indicator in the instrument
cluster flashes to show proper operation of the front and
rear turn signal lights. You can also signal a lane change
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the lever toward you
to switch the headlights back to LOW beam.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
131
Flash to Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the lever is released.
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors on the
overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn OFF the
light. These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or
when the UNLOCK button on the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter is pressed, or when the dimmer control
is turned fully upward, past the second detent.
3
Overhead Console
Interior Lights
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition switch is
moved to the LOCK position. This will occur if the
interior lights were switched ON manually or are on
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
because a door is open. This includes the glove box light.
To restore interior light operation, either turn the ignition
switch ON or cycle the light switch.
Dimmer Control
The dimmer control is part of the
HEADLIGHT switch and is located on
the left side of the instrument panel.
With the parking lights or headlights
on, rotating the dimmer control upward will increase the brightness of
the instrument panel lights and, if so
equipped, the lighting in the door map pockets and
cupholders.
Dome Light Position
Rotate the dimmer control completely upward to the
second detent to turn on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dimmer control is in this
position.
Interior Light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the extreme bottom OFF
position. The interior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control upward to the first detent.
This feature brightens all text displays such as the
odometer, Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),
and radio when the parking lights or headlights are on.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The multifunction lever operates the windshield
wipers and washer when the ignition switch is in
the ON position. The lever is located on the left
side of the steering column.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
133
CAUTION!
Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the WIPER switch is left
in any position other than OFF.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for low speed wiper
operation, or to the second detent past the intermittent
settings for high speed wiper operation.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle with a variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent position, and then turn the
end of the lever to select the desired delay interval. There
are six delay settings, which allow you to regulate the
wipe interval from a minimum of one cycle every second
to a maximum of approximately 23 seconds between
cycles.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to an accident. You might not see other
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist Feature
Push the multifunction lever inward (toward the steering
column) to the first detent to activate a single wipe cycle
to clear off road mist or spray from a passing vehicle. The
wipers will continue to operate until you release the
lever.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, push the multifunction lever inward
(toward the steering column) to the second detent and
hold it for as long as washer spray is desired.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper
control is in the delay range, the wipers will operate for
two wipe cycles after releasing the lever and then resume
the intermittent interval previously selected.
If you activate the washer while the windshield wiper is
turned off, the wipers will operate for three wipe cycles
and then turn off.
Headlights On with Wipers (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on
approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned ON
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
135
if the HEADLIGHT switch is placed in the AUTO position. In addition, the headlights will turn off when the
wipers are turned OFF if they were turned ON by this
feature.
The Headlights On With Wipers feature can be enabled
or disabled. Refer to ”Headlights On with Wipers,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center” in
Section 4.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds to
flush out the residual water.
3
Washer Fluid Reservoir
The fluid reservoir will hold nearly 1 gal (4 l) of washer
fluid when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in
the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen or
shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping control
handle is located below the steering wheel at the end of
the steering column.
To unlock the steering column, pull the control handle
outward. To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering wheel
outward or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
column in position, push the control handle inward until
fully engaged.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
137
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. The
telescoping adjustment must be locked while driving. Adjusting the steering wheel while driving or
driving without the telescoping adjustment locked
could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED
The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a
greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and
seat position. This feature allows both the brake and
accelerator pedal to move toward or away from the
driver to provide improved position with the steering
wheel. The switch is located on the front side of the
driver’s seat cushion side shield.
3
ADJUSTABLE PEDALS Switch
Press the switch forward to move the pedals forward
(toward the front of the vehicle).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press the switch rearward to move the pedals rearward
(toward the driver).
• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.
• The pedals can be adjusted while driving.
• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the transmission
is in REVERSE or when the speed control is ON.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/h).
Electronic Speed Control Operation
The speed control lever located on the right side of the
steering wheel operates the system.
CAUTION!
Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals
or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage
to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the
adjustable pedal’s path.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
139
To Activate
Push and release the ON/OFF button located
on the end of the speed control lever. The
indicator light in the instrument cluster will
illuminate to show that the speed control system is ON. To turn the system OFF, push and release the
ON/OFF button again. The system and the indicator
light will turn off.
WARNING!
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
CANCEL
RESUME ACCEL
ON/OFF
SET DECEL
Leaving the electronic speed control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set
the system or cause it to go faster than you want. You
could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you aren’t using it.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push the
lever downward to SET DECEL and release. Remove
your foot from the accelerator pedal and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed.
NOTE:
• Speed control will only function in 3rd, 4th, or 5th gear
when in the Autostick威 mode (if equipped).
• The speed control may not engage if a different size
tire is installed on one wheel, such as the compact
spare tire.
To Deactivate
The system will disable electronic speed control without
erasing the memory if you:
• Softly tap the brake pedal,
• Pull the speed control lever toward you to CANCEL.
Pushing and releasing the ON/OFF button or turning off
the ignition erases the set speed from memory.
To Resume Speed
If you deactivated the speed control without erasing the
set speed from memory and your vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h) you can resume the previous set
speed. To do so, push the lever upward to RESUME
ACCEL and release. Then remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal.
To Vary the Speed Setting
When the speed control is set, you can increase speed by
pushing upward and holding the lever in RESUME
ACCEL. When the lever is released, a new set speed will
be established.
• Depress the brake pedal, or
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tapping the lever to RESUME ACCEL once will result in
a 1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the lever is
tapped speed increases, so tapping the lever three times
will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while speed control is set, push
downward and hold the lever in SET DECEL. Release the
lever when the desired speed is reached, and a new set
speed will be established.
Tapping the lever to SET DECEL once will result in a 1
mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the lever is
tapped, speed decreases.
To Accelerate For Passing
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
141
Using Speed Control on Hills
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
The automatic transmission will downshift while climbing uphill or descending downhill. This downshift is
necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur, so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
WARNING!
Speed control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
The overhead console contains courtesy/reading lights,
an optional universal garage door opener (HomeLink威),
storage for sunglasses, and an optional power SUNROOF
switch.
Courtesy/Reading Lights
At the forward end of the console are two courtesy/
reading lights.
Press the lens to turn on the light. Press it a second time
to turn off the light.
These lights also turn on when a door is opened, or when
the liftgate is opened, or when the UNLOCK button on
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed,
or when the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past
the second detent.
Sunglasses Storage
At the rear of the console, a compartment is provided for
the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
Overhead Console
The storage compartment access is a ⬙push/push⬙ design.
Push on the raised bar on the compartment door to open.
Push on the raised bar to close.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
143
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
3
The HomeLink威 buttons are located in the overhead
console, and contain one, two, or three dots/lines designating the different HomeLink威 channels.
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety standards. This includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage door
opener without these safety features. Call toll-free
1–800–355–3515
or,
on
the
Internet
at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or
assistance.
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds. The EVIC will display “CLEARING CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC message
states “CHANNELS CLEARED.”
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
while training.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
from the HomeLink威 buttons while keeping the EVIC
display in view.
For optimal training, point the battery end of the handheld transmitter away from the HomeLink威.
3. Simultaneously, press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the EVIC display changes from “CHANNEL #
TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
145
If the EVIC display states “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat Step
3. If the signal is too weak, replace the battery in the
original hand-held transmitter.
It may take up to 30 seconds, or longer, in rare cases. The
garage door may open and close while you train.
NOTE: Some gate operators and garage door openers
may require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted
in the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button. If
the channel has been trained, the EVIC display will now
state “CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.”
If the EVIC display still states “CHANNEL # TRAINING” repeat Step 3.
Then release both the HomeLink威 and hand-held transmitter buttons.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the
garage door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the
garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have rolling code. If so, proceed
to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code System.”
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “learn” or “training” button.
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or “training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
147
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink” Step 3 with the following:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
EVIC display will change from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to “CHANNEL # TRAINED.”
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc.) The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button for 20
seconds until the EVIC display states “CHANNEL #
TRAINING.” Do not release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming HomeLink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20
seconds until the EVIC message states “CHANNELS
CLEARED.” Note that all channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the learn button on the garage door opener to
complete the training for rolling code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you are having any problems or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
149
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term “IC:” before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power SUNROOF switch is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power SUNROOF switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
Power Sunroof Controls
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof - Express
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully and then stop automatically. This is called
Express Open. During Express Open operation, any
movement of the SUNROOF switch will stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof - Express
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully and stop automatically. This is called
Express Close. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the SUNROOF switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
151
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. Next, press the switch forward and
release to Express Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the closed position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
Venting Sunroof - Express
Press and release the ⬙V⬙ button in the center of the
switch, and the sunroof will open to the vent position.
This is called Express Vent, which operates regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the SUNROOF switch will stop the sunroof.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Ignition Off Operation
The power SUNROOF switch will remain active for up to
60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned OFF.
Opening either front door will cancel this feature. The
time for this feature is programmable. Refer to “Delay
Power Off to Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal
Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the
buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, then adjust the
sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
Sunroof Fully Closed
Press the switch forward and release to ensure that the
sunroof is fully closed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There are three 12-volt electrical outlets on this vehicle.
All of the outlets are protected by fuses.
The 12-volt power outlet next to the ash receiver tray (if
equipped with an optional Smoker’s Package) has power
available only when the ignition is ON. This outlet will
also operate a conventional cigar lighter unit.
153
NOTE: If desired, the power outlet next to the ash
receiver tray (if equipped) can be converted by your
authorized dealer to provide power with the ignition
switch in the LOCK position.
3
WARNING!
Do not place ashes inside the cubby bin located on
the center console on vehicles not equipped with the
ash receiver tray. A fire leading to bodily injury could
result.
Front Power Outlet
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The center console outlet is powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting.
The auxiliary outlet is also powered directly from the
battery (power available at all times). Items plugged into
this outlet may discharge the battery and/or prevent
engine starting.
Center Console Power Outlet
Auxiliary Power Outlet
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
155
CUPHOLDERS
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw power
from the vehicle’s battery even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent engine starting.
Front Seat Cupholders
The cupholders are located in the forward edge of the
center console.
3
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers, vacuum
cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more
quickly. Only use these intermittently and with greater
caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories or long
periods of the vehicle not being started (with accessories
still plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to recharge the
vehicle’s battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only. Do
not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from
the plug. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Front Seat Cupholders
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Seat Cupholders
The rear seat cupholders are located in the center armrest
between the rear seats. The cupholders are positioned
forward in the armrest and side-by-side to provide
convenient access to beverage cans or bottles while
maintaining a resting place for the rear occupants’ elbows.
Rear Seat Cupholders
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
157
STORAGE
Console Features
The center console contains two shift bezel cubby bins
with rubber mats for holding small items. For vehicles
not equipped with navigation radio, the console also
contains an extra storage bin located below the climate
control, which holds up to four CD jewel cases.
3
Without Vehicle Entertainment System (VES)威
Two separate storage compartments are also located
underneath the armrest.
1 — Release button for bottom compartment
2 — Release button for top compartment
3 — Top Compartment
4 — Bottom Compartment. You can access this compartment
directly, without first exposing the upper compartment, by operating the Release Button for the bottom compartment with the
armrest down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The top compartment holds small items, such as a pen
and note pad, while the larger bottom compartment will
hold CDs and alike. The bottom compartment also contains a 12-volt power outlet and a molded-in coin holder
(designed to hold various size coins). A slot in the left and
right side of the top compartment provides clearance for
power cords to pass conveniently out of the bin with the
lid closed. This feature is ideal for games, laptops, cell
phones, or other electrical equipment. The console’s front
opening lid allows for easy access to these compartments.
With Vehicle Entertainment System (VES)威
The center console contains a large storage compartment.
The storage compartment contains a 12-volt power outlet
and a molded-in coin holder (designed to hold various
size coins). A slot in the top left and right side of the
storage compartment provides clearance for power cords
to pass conveniently out of the compartment with the lid
closed. This feature is ideal for games, laptops, cell
phones, or other electrical equipment. The console’s
front-opening lid allows for easy access to the storage
compartment for both the driver and the front passenger.
Cargo Management System — If Equipped
The cargo area has an upper and lower load floor.
Additional innovative features in the cargo area are the
two molded-in bins in the quarter trim panels. Each bin
will hold a gallon of milk and a 2-liter bottle of pop.
A cargo management system that stores on the lower
load floor below the bi-level cargo floor is optional. It
includes the following equipment:
• Waterproof cargo floor liner.
• Folding cargo management container with net separators.
The bi-level cargo floor includes a removable, tri-fold
load-bearing upper level. Two folds in the panel allow it to
be partially or fully folded for storage flexibility. Shallow
items can be stored underneath the upper load floor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The lower load floor is hinged to provide access to the
spare tire (if equipped), battery, and rear electrical power
distribution center.
The 60/40 split-folding rear seat provides cargo-carrying
versatility. The seatbacks fold down easily by pulling
nylon tabs between the seatbacks and the bolsters. When
the seats are folded down, they provide a continuous,
nearly-flat extension of the removable tri-fold load floor.
159
remove it from the vehicle. Folding and/or removing the
load floor will add four inches to the height of the cargo
area for increased utility. Use the handle to adjust the
position of the load floor. The load floor positions are
shown in the following illustrations.
Tri-Fold Upper Load Floor
The removable tri-fold upper load floor has two different
surfaces for increased utility. One side is carpeted for a
plush appearance and the other side is covered with
vinyl for easy cleaning. The panel, sandwiched between
the carpet and the washable-vinyl, is constructed from a
strong lightweight material that gives the floor its loadbearing strength.
You can place the load floor in a partially folded position,
a fully folded position, or a flat position. You can also
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Load Floor Handle
3
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Load Floor Partially Folded
Load Floor Fully Folded
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
161
Rollaway Tonneau Cover — If Equipped
The removable rollaway tonneau cover mounts in the
cargo area behind the top of the rear seats.
3
The tonneau cover rolls away neatly inside its housing
when not in use. You can also remove the tonneau cover
from the vehicle to make more room in the cargo area.
The tonneau cover, when extended, covers the cargo area
to keep items out of sight. Notches in the trim panels near
the liftgate opening secure the extended tonneau cover in
place.
To install the tonneau cover, position it in the vehicle so
that the flat side of the housing faces upward. Then,
insert either the left or the right spring-loaded post
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
162
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
(located on the ends of the tonneau cover housing) into
the left or the right front attachment point shown.
Next, grab the tonneau cover handle and pull the cover
toward you. As the cover nears the liftgate opening,
guide the rear attachment posts (on both ends of the
cover) into the notches in the trim panels. Then, lower the
cover to position the posts into the bottom of the notches
and release the handle.
Front Attachment Points
Then, insert the spring-loaded post on the opposite end
of the tonneau cover housing into the remaining front
attachment point.
Rear Attachment Points
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Waterproof Liner
The optional waterproof liner can be placed over the
lower load floor.
163
Cargo Organizer
The optional cargo organizer can also be placed into the
lower load floor. Lift the handle and pull to open the
cargo organizer.
3
Waterproof Liner
Cargo Organizer Handle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
164
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Cargo tie-down hooks are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision, a hook could pull loose and allow the child
seat to come loose. A child could be badly injured.
Use only the anchors provided for child seat
tethers.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor and on the
rear trim panels should be used to safely secure loads
when the vehicle is moving.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of the
vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of the
seatback. This could impair visibility or become a
dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or collision.
WARNING!
To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats and
use seat belts.
165
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The roof luggage rack consists of side rails and adjustable
crossbars. The roof luggage rack is designed to carry up
to 150 lbs (68 kg) of cargo uniformly distributed over
both crossbars.
When loading cargo on the roof luggage rack, distribute
the cargo weight evenly on the crossbars. The roof
luggage rack does not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total load of
cargo inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack
does not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
more information about cargo and load capacity. The
placard is located on either the driver’s side “B” pillar or
the driver door.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
166
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust, remove, or install the crossbars, proceed as
follows:
3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 on the opposite clamp on the
other side of the crossbar.
4. Pick up the crossbar and move it to the desired
location. Do not place the crossbar directly over the
sunroof glass (if equipped).
5. Turn the lower clamp until the round side of the clamp
completely faces the side rail.
6. Turn the lever clockwise to tighten the lower clamp to
the side rail. When tight, flip the lever downward.
7. Repeat Steps 5 and 6 on the opposite clamp on the
other side of the crossbar.
Roof Luggage Rack
1. Flip the lever on the end of the crossbar upward.
2. Turn the lever counterclockwise to loosen the lower
clamp. When the lower clamp is loose, turn it until the
round side of the clamp completely faces away from the
side rail.
8. Attempt to move the crossbar to ensure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE: To reduce the amount of wind noise when the
crossbars are not in use, remove both crossbars from the
side rails and place them inside the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
167
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150
lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly
as possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward force on loads. This is
especially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
• Do not use the pop-up feature of the sliding / pop-up
roof when positioning or placing luggage above it to
prevent damage to the sliding / pop-up roof panel.
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
3
168
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
LOAD LEVELING SYSTEM
The automatic load leveling system will provide a levelriding vehicle under most passenger and cargo loading
conditions.
If the leveled vehicle is not moved for approximately 15
hours, the leveling system will bleed itself down. The
vehicle must be driven to reset the system.
A hydraulic pump contained within the shock absorbers
raises the rear of the vehicle to the correct height. It takes
approximately 1 mi (1.6 km) of driving for the leveling to
complete depending on road surface conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
▫ Telephone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
䡵 Premium Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
▫ Navigation — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
▫ Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . 185
▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
▫ Trip Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
▫ Performance Pages — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 191
▫ Compass Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
▫ System Warnings (Customer Information
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
▫ Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
䡵 Radio General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
170
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Two Types Of Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
▫ Electrical Disturbances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ AM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ FM Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
䡵 Sales Code REN — Multimedia System — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威) (If Equipped) . . . 206
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And
6–Disc CD/DVD Changer
(MP3/WMA AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 209
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD And
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . . . . . 217
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . . 219
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For
MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For
MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
䡵 Sales Code RER — Multimedia System —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio . . . . . 226
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
171
▫ Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威) (If Equipped) . . . 226
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
▫ Selecting Satellite Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With CD
Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . 229
▫ Operation Instructions - CD Mode For CD And
MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
▫ Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode . . . . . . 244
▫ Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 240
▫ Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES™) (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . . 240
䡵 Sirius Backseat TV™ — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 247
䡵 Satellite Radio (RSC) — If Equipped
(RER/REQ/REN Radios Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
䡵 Video Entertainment System (VES)威 —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
172
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Kicker威 13-Speaker High Performance Sound
System With Driver-Selectable Surround
(DSS) – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ Kicker威 Mobile Surround (KMS1)威 –
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
䡵 Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Device . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Using Radio Buttons . . . 252
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
䡵 CD/DVD Disc Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . . 257
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Manual Air Conditioning And
Heating System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ Automatic Temperature Control —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Rear Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Rear Washer Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Electric Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . 271
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
173
INSTRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
— Air Outlet
— Instrument Cluster
— Rear WIPER/WASHER Switch
— HAZARD Switch
— Electronic Stability Program OFF Button*
— Glove Box
7 — Radio
8 — Climate Control
9 — HEATED SEAT Switch*
10 — Power Outlet
11 — Ash Tray*
12 — Storage Compartment*
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
13 — Ignition Switch
14 — Hood Release
15 — HEADLIGHT Switch
* If Equipped
174
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank when
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
2. Trip Odometer Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of two trip odometer settings. The letter “A” or “B”
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 mi (km). The odometer must be in TRIP mode to
reset it.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Electronic Speed Control Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON. (See page 138 for more
information.)
175
5. Tachometer
The red segments indicate the maximum permissible
engine revolutions per minute (RPM. x 1000) for each
gear range. Ease up on the accelerator before reaching the
red area.
6. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should turn on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or turns on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices (i.e., radio) or slightly increase engine
speed (if at idle). If the light remains on, it means that the
charging system is experiencing a problem. See your
local authorized dealer to obtain service immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
7. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light will turn on briefly as a bulb check
when the ignition switch is turned ON. This
light will also turn on while the engine is
running if there is a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control system.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, safely
bring the vehicle to a complete stop as soon as possible,
place the shift lever in PARK, and cycle the ignition key.
The light should turn off. If the light remains lit with the
engine running, your vehicle will usually be drivable.
However, see your authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
If the light is flashing when the engine is running,
immediate service is required. In this case, you may
experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle
or engine stall, and your vehicle may require towing.
Also, have the system checked by an authorized dealer if
the light does not come on during starting.
8. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
177
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine OFF immediately and call for service.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph.
9. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated. (See page 130
for more information.)
NOTE: A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mi (1.6 km) with either turn signal on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
178
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
10. Airbag Warning Light
This light will turn on for six to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is either not on during
starting, or stays on, or turns on while driving,
then have the system inspected at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. (See page 61 for more information.)
11. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound to warn of an overheated engine condition.
When this light turns on, the engine temperature
is critically hot. The vehicle should be turned OFF
immediately and serviced as soon as possible. (See page
364 for more information.)
12. Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/Traction
Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as
little throttle as possible. Adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions, and
do not switch off the ESP. (See page 300 for more
information.)
13. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) / Brake Assist
System (BAS) Malfunction Indicator Light
The yellow ESP/BAS malfunction indicator
light will turn on when the key in the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position. The light
should go out with the engine running. If the
light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected. (See page 300 for more information.)
14. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light shows low engine oil pressure. The light
should turn on momentarily when the engine is
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, and shut OFF the engine as soon as possible. A
single chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked using the procedure
shown in Section 7. (See page 385 for more information.)
15. High Beam Light
This light will turn on when the high beam
headlights are ON. Push the multifunction lever
179
away from the steering wheel to switch the headlights to
high beam. (See page 129 for more information.)
16. Seat Belt Reminder Light
This light will turn on for five to eight seconds as
a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. A chime will sound if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled during the bulb check. The Seat Belt
Warning Light will flash or remain on continuously if the
driver’s seat belt remains unbuckled after the bulb check
or when driving. (See page 46 for more information.)
17. Transmission Range Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
gear selection.
18. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the front fog lights are
ON. (See page 129 for more information.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
180
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
19. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display
This display shows the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC) messages when the appropriate conditions
exist. (See page 185 for more information.)
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the EVIC.
Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP
ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
(See page 381 for more information.)
20. Brake System Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS).
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity to a portion of the hydraulic system in the event of a
failure. Failure of either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder drops
below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which could change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service performed,
and the brake fluid level checked.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Immediate repair is necessary if brake failure is indicated.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed. It will
take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have an
accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with ABS are also equipped with
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). Both the Brake
Warning Light and the ABS Light will turn on in the
event of an EBD failure. Immediate repair of the ABS is
required in the event of an EBD failure.
The operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked
by turning the ignition switch from the LOCK position to
181
the ON position. The light should turn on for approximately two seconds and then turn off. The light will
remain on if the parking brake is applied or if a brake
fault is detected. If the parking brake is not applied and
the light remains on, or if the light does not turn on, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
NOTE: The light will turn on when the ignition switch
is in the ON position and the parking brake is applied.
This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It
does not show the degree of brake application. (See page
297 for more information.)
21. Vehicle Security Alarm (VSA) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The VSA Indicator Light flashes rapidly when the VSA is
arming, and slowly when the VSA is armed. (See page 18
for more information.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
182
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light — If
Equipped
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or
more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and
can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
continue to function properly. (See page 327 for more
information.)
183
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
184
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
23. Anti-Lock Brake Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving,
then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and service is required. However, the conventional brake system will continue to operate normally
if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer. (See page 297 for
more information.)
24. Low Fuel Indicator Light
This light will turn on and a single chime will
sound when the fuel level drops to 1/8 tank. (See
page 341 for more information.)
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD. The OBD system monitors engine
and automatic transmission control systems. The
MIL will turn on when the key is in the ON position
before engine start. If the MIL does not come on when
turning the key from OFF to ON, have the condition
checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the MIL
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The MIL flashes to alert you to serious conditions that could
lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter
damage. The vehicle should be serviced as soon as possible
if this occurs. (See page 381 for more information.)
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC)
185
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display. It is located in the
instrument cluster below the speedometer. Vehicles
equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons (described in this section) are also equipped with the EVIC.
The EVIC consists of the following:
• System status,
• Vehicle information warning message displays,
• Tire Pressure Monitor System,
• Personal settings (customer programmable features),
• Compass display,
• Outside temperature display,
• Trip computer functions,
Electronic Vehicle Information Center
• UConnect威 hands-free communication system displays (if equipped),
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
186
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Navigation system screens (if equipped),
• Audio mode display,
• Surround Sound modes (if equipped with DriverSelectable Surround [DSS]), and
Press the FUNCTION SELECT button to accept
a selection. The FUNCTION SELECT button
also functions as a remote sound system conFUNC- trol. Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls”
TION in this section.
• Performance Pages (if equipped).
SELECT
Button
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel.
Press and release the MENU button and the
mode displayed will change between Trip
Functions, Performance Pages (if equipped),
MENU Navigation (if equipped), System Warnings,
Button System Status, Personal Settings, Telephone (if
equipped), and Surround Sound (if equipped).
Press the SCROLL button to scroll through Trip
Functions, Performance Pages (if equipped),
Navigation (if equipped), System Status MesSCROLL sages, and Personal Settings (Customer ProButton grammable Features). The SCROLL button also
functions as a remote sound system control.
Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls” in this section.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. Along with
compass reading and outside temperature, this
AUDIO screen will display radio and media mode
MODE information depending on which radio is in the
Button vehicle. Refer to “Remote Sound System Controls” in this section.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Displays
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages:
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime if
the vehicle is driven more than 1 mi [1.6 km] with
either turn signal on)
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
187
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in PARK
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph [1.6 km/h])
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
• Liftgate Ajar (with a single chime)
• Low Washer Fluid (with a single chime)
• Oil Pressure
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
188
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Channel # Transmit
• Check TPM System (with a single chime). Refer to
“Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
• Channel # Training
• Check Gascap (refer to “Adding Fuel” in Section 5)
• Channel # Trained
• Insert Key/Turn To Run (refer to “Remote Starting
System” in Section 2)
• Clearing Channels
• Channels Cleared
• Upshift
• Did Not Train
• Left Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
• Left Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer to
“Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
• Right Front Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to “Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
• Right Rear Low Pressure (with a single chime). Refer
to “Starting And Operating, Tire Section”
• Stereo (if equipped with Driver-Selectable Surround
Sound [DSS])
• Video Surround (if equipped with Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound [DSS])
• Audio Surround (if equipped with Driver-Selectable
Surround Sound [DSS])
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) (if equipped with Performance
Pages)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Braking Distance (if equipped with Performance
Pages)
• 1/8 Mile (if equipped with Performance Pages)
• Trip B
• Elapsed Time
• Display Units of Measure in
• 1/4 Mile (if equipped with Performance Pages)
• Instantaneous G-Force (if equipped with Performance
Pages)
• Peak G-Force (if equipped with Performance Pages)
• Digital Speedometer (if equipped with Performance
Pages)
Trip Functions
Press and release the MENU button until one of the
following Trip Functions displays in the EVIC:
• Average Fuel Economy
189
Press the SCROLL button to cycle through all the Trip
Computer functions.
The Trip Functions mode displays the following.
• Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel average reading before the
reset.
• Distance To Empty
• Trip A
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
190
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. DTE cannot be reset through the FUNCTION
SELECT button.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
• When the DTE value is less than 30 mi (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will
change to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL.⬙ This display
will continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding
a significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off
the ⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will
display.
• Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
reset.
• Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
reset.
• Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
• Display Units of Measure in
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or “METRIC” appears.
To Reset The Display
Reset will only occur while a resettable function is being
displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
button once to clear the resettable function being displayed. To reset all resettable functions, press and release
the FUNCTION SELECT button a second time within
three seconds of resetting the currently-displayed function. (>Reset ALL will display during this three-second
window.)
191
Performance Pages — If Equipped
WARNING!
Measurement of vehicle statistics with the Performance Pages is intended for off-highway or off-road
use only and should not be done on any public
roadways. It is recommended that these features be
used in a controlled environment and within the
limits of the law. The capabilities of the vehicle as
measured by the performance pages must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which
can jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
192
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The Performance Pages include the following features:
• 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
• Braking Distance
• 1/8 Mile
0-60 mph (0-100 km/h)
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes for
the vehicle to go from 0 to 60 mph (0 to 100 km/h) within
10 seconds.
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle speed is at
0 mph (0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when
conditions are met for the event to begin.
• 1/4 Mile
• Instantaneous G-Force
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 60 mph
(100 km/h) in less then 10 seconds.
• Peak G-Force
• Digital Speedometer
To access, press and release the MENU button until
Performance Pages displays in the EVIC. Press the
SCROLL button to cycle through the features. Press the
FUNCTION SELECT button to select a feature.
The following describes each feature and its operation:
• The time will continue to display until the FUNCTION
SELECT button is pressed.
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
current run time and display the vehicle’s best 0-60
mph (0-100 km/h) time.
• To clear the vehicle’s best 0-60 mph (0-100 km/h) time,
press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for
five seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Braking Distance
When selected, this screen displays the vehicle’s braking
distance and the speed at which the brake pedal was
depressed.
• This feature will only function when applying the
brakes at speeds above 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Engaging the parking brake will disable this feature.
• The word “READY” will flash when conditions are
met for the event to begin.
• The distance and speed measurements display while
the event is taking place.
• The distance measurement will be aborted if the brake
pedal is released before the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
193
• The distance and speed measurements will continue to
display until the FUNCTION SELECT button is
pressed.
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
current run and prepare the cluster to record a new
run.
1/8 Mile, 1/4 Mile
When selected, this screen displays the time it takes the
vehicle to travel 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) within 30 seconds
and the vehicle’s speed when it reaches 1/8 mile (1/4
mile).
• The feature will “ready” when the vehicle is at 0 mph
(0 km/h). The word “READY” will flash when conditions are met for the event to begin.
• Dashes will display if the vehicle fails to reach 1/8
mile (1/4 mile) in less then 30 seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
194
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• The time and speed will continue to display until the
FUNCTION SELECT button is pressed.
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
current run and display the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile
(1/4 mile) run.
• When a force greater than zero is measured, the
display will update the value as it climbs. As the
G-Force falls, the peak forces will continue to display.
• Pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will clear the
peak force values.
• To clear the vehicle’s best 1/8 mile (1/4 mile) run,
press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for
five seconds.
Digital Speedometer
When selected, this screen displays vehicle speed and
records top speed.
Instantaneous G-Force
When selected, this screen displays the current G-Force
(longitude and latitude) along with a friction circle that
displays the directions of the forces.
• Press and hold the FUNCTION SELECT button for
three seconds to toggle between current speed and top
speed.
Peak G-Force
When selected, this screen displays all four G-force
values (two longitude and two latitude).
• To reset top speed, quickly press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button when top speed is displayed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Display
The compass readings indicate the direction
the vehicle is facing. Press and release the
COMPASS button to display one of eight comCOM- pass readings and the outside temperature.
PASS
Button
Automatic Compass Calibration
This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360
degree turns (in an area free from large metal or metallic
objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in the EVIC
turns off. The compass will now function normally.
195
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” message
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approximately two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Calibrate Compass”
displays in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button to
start the calibration. The message “CAL” will display in
the EVIC.
5. Complete one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free
from large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL”
message turns off. The compass will now function normally.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
196
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between magnetic
North and geographic North. In some areas of the
country, the difference between magnetic and geographic
North is great enough to cause the compass to give false
readings. If this occurs, the compass variance must be set
using the following procedure:
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from
the overhead console. This is where the compass sensor is
located.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approximately two seconds.
3. Press the SCROLL button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays in
the EVIC.
4. Press and release FUNCTION SELECT button until
the proper variance zone is selected according to the
map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.
Telephone — If Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Telephone”
displays in the EVIC.
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC provides the following telephone information:
197
• Phone status: idle, voice mail, roaming, battery
strength, and signal strength in increments of 20
percent.
• Call status: Incoming call, connecting, connected, air
time in minutes and seconds, call ended, call failed,
roaming, and no phone connection.
• UConnect威 active.
• Caller ID phone number display.
When the appropriate conditions exist, and if supported
by the cell phone, the EVIC will display the following
telephone symbols:
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
signal strength of the UConnect威 phone. The
number of horizontal bars increases as the
Signal strength of the UConnect威 phone signal inStrength creases.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate an
incoming call.
Incoming Call
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
you have voice mail.
Voice
Mail
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect威 phone is currently in analog
mode.
Analog
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect威 phone is currently roaming.
Roaming
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate a
text message.
Text
Message
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate the
battery strength of the UConnect威 phone.
Battery
Strength
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
a phone connection has been made.
Call in
Progress
The EVIC displays this symbol to indicate that
the UConnect威 phone is currently not available.
Phone
Not
Available
Navigation — If Equipped
Navigation Display Control
Press and release the MENU button until Navigation
displays in the EVIC. When the Navigation System is On,
the steering wheel buttons can be used to select the Map
or Menu display on the Navigation Unit. When the Menu
199
display is active, the SCROLL button can be used to scroll
through the list, the FUNCTION SELECT button can be
used to select an item, and the AUDIO MODE button can
be used to return to the previous menu. When the Map
display is active, pressing the FUNCTION SELECT button will change the Navigation Unit Display to the Menu.
Turn-by-Turn Directions
The EVIC displays turn-by-turn directions to a programmed destination when Turn-by-Turn Navigation is
enabled through Personal Settings. When enabled, the
EVIC displays the name of the approaching road at the
top of the screen, followed by an arrow to indicate the
direction to turn the vehicle, and a count down to
indicate the distance to the turn.
NOTE: Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for
detailed operating instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Driver-Selectable Surround Sound (DSS) – If
Equipped
Press and release the MENU button until “Surround
Sound” displays in the EVIC. The EVIC provides information on the current surround mode.
• Stereo
System Warnings (Customer Information
Features)
Press and release the MENU button until “SYSTEM
WARNINGS” displays in the EVIC. Then, press the
SCROLL button to display anyone of the following
choices.
• Oil Temperature
Shows the actual oil temperature.
• Video Surround
• Audio Surround
While in the Surround Sound menu, press the FUNCTION SELECT button to change surround modes. The
Video Surround Mode will only be available for video
media sources (DVDs, Video CDs, or other video media
supported by the radio).
• Oil Pressure
Shows the actual oil pressure.
• Tire Pressure
Shows the actual tire pressure for each tire (EXCLUDING
THE SPARE TIRE).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Personal Settings (Customer Programmable
Features)
Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall
features when the transmission is in PARK.
Press and release the MENU button until Personal Settings displays in the EVIC.
Use the SCROLL button to display one of the following
choices.
“Language”
When in this display you may select one of five languages for all display nomenclature, including the trip
functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press
the FUNCTION SELECT button while in this display to
select English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, or Francais.
Then, as you continue, the information will display in the
selected language.
201
NOTE: The EVIC will not change the UConnect威 language selection. Refer to “Language Selection” under
“Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
“Lock Doors Automatically at 15 mph (24 km/h)”
When ON is selected, all doors will lock automatically
when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).
To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Unlock Doors Automatically on Exit”
When ON is selected, all doors will unlock when the
vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or
NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To
make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
202
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Remote Key Unlock”
When Driver Door 1st Press is selected, only the driver’s
door will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) UNLOCK button. When Driver Door 1st
Press is selected, you must press the RKE UNLOCK
button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When All
Doors 1st Press is selected, all of the doors will unlock on
the first press of the RKE UNLOCK button. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “Driver Door 1st Press” or “All Doors 1st
Press” appears.
“Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock”
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE LOCK button is pressed. This feature may be
selected with or without the flash lights on lock/unlock
feature. To make your selection, press and release the
FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock”
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked with the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To make
your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Headlights On with Wipers” (Available with Auto
Headlights Only)
When ON is selected, and the HEADLIGHT switch is in
the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on. The
headlights will also turn off when the wipers are turned
off if they were turned on by this feature. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Turning the headlights on during the daytime
causes the instrument panel lights to dim. To increase the
brightness, refer to “Lights” in Section 3.
“Delay Turning Headlights Off”
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press
and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “0,”
“30,” “60,” or “90” appears.
“Turn Headlights On with Remote Key Unlock”
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked with the RKE transmitter. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “OFF,” “30 sec.,” “60 sec.,” or “90 sec.” appears.
203
“Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit”
When this feature is selected, the power WINDOW
switches, radio, hands-free system (if equipped), DVD
video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped),
and power outlets will remain active for up to 60 minutes
after the ignition switch is turned OFF. Opening a vehicle
door will cancel this feature. To make your selection,
press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button until
“Off,” “45 sec.,” “5 min.,” “10 min.,” “30 min.,” or “60
min.” appears.
“Confirmation of Voice Commands” — If
Equipped
When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
UConnect威 system are confirmed. To make your selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT button
until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
“Turn-by-Turn Navigation” — If Equipped
When ON is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will
appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route. To make your
selection, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
button until “ON” or “OFF” appears.
“Display Units of Measure in”
The EVIC, odometer, and navigation system (if
equipped) can be changed between English and Metric
units of measure. To make your selection, press and
release the FUNCTION SELECT button until “US” or
“METRIC” appears.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile operation and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
you understand and save you concern about these “apparent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio signals.
Two Types of Signals
There are two basic types of radio signals: AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary; and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
205
OFF. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
The time is programmable. Refer to “Delay Power Off to
Accessories Until Exit,” under “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
SALES CODE REN — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
FM Reception
Because FM transmission is based on frequency variations, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
The REN Multimedia system contains a radio, CD/DVD
player, USB port, a 20-gigabyte hard drive (HDD), and a
“JukeBox” (virtual CD changer). Sirius Satellite Radio is
optional. The 6.5-in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows for easy
menu selection.
NOTE: The radio, steering wheel radio controls, and
6-disc CD/DVD changer (if equipped) will remain active
for up to 60 minutes after the ignition switch is turned
A 20-gigabyte HDD allows uploads of music and photos
from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenote
database finds the artist, track, and title for the music.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
206
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For
vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES)威, separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen
to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play
through the system’s wireless headphones. This means
rear-seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional
rear seat entertainment system, while the driver and
front-seat passenger listen to the radio.
Other special features include direct tune, music type
selections, easy store presets, backup camera display for
vehicles equipped with a backup camera, and on some
models, a dual display screen operation. Refer to your
Radio-specific user’s manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio (If
Equipped)
Refer to your Radio-specific user’s manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
For Hands Free Phone Communication (UConnect威)
“Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect姞) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
207
5. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Clock Setting Procedure
Setting the Clock
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
4. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are displayed to change the current setting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
208
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the multimedia system is
turned off. Proceed as follows to change the current
setting:
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
209
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
REQ Radio
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
210
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “UConnect威 System Not
Available” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Phone) — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “UConnect威 System Not
Available” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at step
2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
211
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid range tones.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
212
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
16-Digit Character
Display
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Program Type
Top 40
Weather
213
16-Digit Character
Display
Top 40
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
214
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
NOTE: The available selections for each of the above
entries varies depending upon the disc.
NOTE: These selections can only be made while playing
a DVD.
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
• VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2, wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items, and set
defaults according to customer preference.
215
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
216
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM Modes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
217
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
218
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the eject button and the pushbutton with
the corresponding number (1-6) where the CD
was loaded and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. Radio display
will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is being
ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the eject button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD, MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
219
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio to the Radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
24, 22.05, 16
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
WMA
Specification
WMA
221
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
48, 64, 96, 128,
44.1 and 48
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
223
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
224
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
⬙Dolby⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories.
For UConnect威 “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to
“Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES™) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES™)
Guide.”
DTS™
⬙DTS⬙ and ⬙DTS 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital Theater
Systems, Inc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RER — MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The RER Multimedia system contains a radio, Sirius
Satellite Radio player, navigation system, CD/DVD
player, USB port, 20-gigabyte hard drive (HDD), and the
UConnect威 Hands-Free Bluetooth威 cellular system.
NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with UConnect威,
the unit will respond with a “Feature Not Available”
message when selecting controls related to this feature.
A 6.5-in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows easy menu selection, while the Advanced Voice Dialog System recognizes
more than 1,000 words for audio, navigation, entertainment, and hands-free mobile phone use.
225
The satellite navigation capability combines a GlobalPositioning System (GPS)-based navigation system with
an integrated color screen to provide maps, turn identification, selection menus, and instructions for selecting a
variety of destinations and routes.
A shared HDD for the navigation system, the database,
and other radio features allows uploads of music and
photos from CDs or through the USB port. The Gracenote
database finds the artist, track, and title for the music.
An auxiliary input jack permits passengers to listen to a
portable MP3 player through the vehicle’s speakers. For
vehicles equipped with the Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES)威, separate audio outputs allow passengers to listen
to the vehicle speakers while different audio tracks play
through the system’s wireless headphones. This means
rear-seat passengers can watch a DVD on the optional
rear-seat entertainment system while the driver and
front-seat passenger listen to the radio.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Other special features include direct tune, music type
selections, traffic messaging (optional), easy store presets,
parental lockout for VES™ (if equipped), backup camera
display for vehicles equipped with a backup camera, and
on some models, a dual display screen operation. Refer to
your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed operating
instructions.
Clock Setting Procedure
The GPS receiver in this system is synchronized to the
time data being transmitted by the GPS satellites. The
satellites’ clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is
the worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone
and daylight savings information is set.
Operating Instructions — Satellite Radio
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
Changing the Time Zone
Operating Instructions — Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect姞) (If Equipped)
Refer to your “Navigation User’s Manual” for detailed
operating instructions.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
“Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top of the screen,
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
3. If the words “Time: User Clock” are displayed at the
top of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where
the words “User Clock” are displayed. The GPS time
setting menu will appear on the screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
5. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
227
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are displayed to change the current setting.
Setting the User Clock
If you wish to set the clock to a time different from the
system clock, you can manually adjust the time by
performing the following:
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen. If the words
“Time: User Clock” are displayed at the top of the screen,
proceed to Step 4. Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. If the words “Time: GPS Time” are displayed at the top
of the screen, touch the bottom of the screen where the
words “GPS Time” are displayed. The user clock time
setting menu will appear on the screen.
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the system is turned off.
Proceed as follows to change the current setting:
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
1. Turn on the multimedia system.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
229
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of your radio faceplate.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RES Radio (Non-Satellite Model Shown - With Satellite
Similar)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
230
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM or FM frequencies,
pausing for five seconds at each listenable station before
continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the
SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free
Phone) — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with this or this feature is
not available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect” message will display on the radio screen.
PHONE Button (UConnect威 Hands-Free Phone) —
If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) feature (if equipped). Refer to “Hands-Free
Communication (UConnect威)” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with this or this feature is
not available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
UConnect威” message will display on the radio screen.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button
Press the TIME button and the time of day will display. In
AM or FM mode, pressing the TIME button will switch
between the time and frequency displays.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button, until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
231
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
232
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Program Type
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
16-Digit Character
Display
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
233
4
234
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM modes.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
stations to be stored into pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by pressing
the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
235
NOTE: This radio is capable of playing compact discs
(CD), recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
an inch (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must
be ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
236
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD, MP3 modes.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press the RW button to stop the CD at the beginning of
the current CD track/title.
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button
Switches the AM or FM radio to the opposite radio mode.
237
RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
238
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
239
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
240
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
241
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone
(UConnect威) (If Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Satellite Radio” in this section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System™ (VES™) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System™
(VES™) Guide.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
242
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SATELLITE RADIO (RSC) — IF EQUIPPED
(RER/REQ/REN RADIOS ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will contact you to
supply a welcome kit and to confirm subscription information, including the setup of your on-line listening
account at no additional charge. For further information,
call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius
web site at www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca
for Canadian residents. Please have the following information available when calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio ON, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With RER/REN Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
243
Next touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will be displayed.
Selecting Satellite Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
244
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Satellite Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
INFO Button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle between Artist, Song
Title, and Composer (if available) information. Also,
pressing and holding the INFO button for an additional
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
three seconds will make the radio display the Song Title
all of the time (press and hold again to return to normal
display).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
245
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
246
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Hands-Free Phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “Hands-Free Communication (UConnect威)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES™) (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES™)
Guide.”
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SIRIUS BACKSEAT TV™ — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite video uses direct satellite receiver broadcasting
technology to provide streaming video coast to coast. The
subscription service provider is SIRIUS Satellite Radio.
SIRIUS Backseat TV™ offers three video channels for
family entertainment, directly from its satellites and
broadcasting studios.
NOTE: SIRIUS service is not available in Hawaii and
has limited coverage in Alaska.
247
VIDEO ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM (VES)姞 — IF
EQUIPPED
The optional Video Entertainment System (VES)威 includes the following components for rear seat entertainment:
• A diagonal 7 in (17.8 cm) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
screen integrated into the center console armrest. The
screen features brightness control for optimum daytime and nighttime viewing.
Refer to your Video Entertainment System (VES), RER
Navigation or REN Multimedia User Manuals for detailed operating instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
248
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Opening the Rear Seat VES威
VES威 Video Screen
• The LCD Screen swings up from the rear of the
armrest to allow the rear seat passenger(s) to view the
display.
NOTE: Close the armrest after the LCD screen has been
raised to its viewing position.
• The touch screen radio and DVD player controls allow
front seat operation for easy setup in the case of
younger rear seat passengers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• A battery-powered infrared remote control snaps into
a molded compartment in the center console armrest
upper storage bin.
249
Audio/Video RCA Jacks (AUX Jacks)
on the rear of the center console enable
the monitor to display video directly
from a video camera, connect video
games for display on the screen, or
play music directly from an MP3
player.
1. Video in (yellow)
2. Left audio in (white)
3. Right audio in (red)
NOTE: Refer to your “Vehicle Entertainment System
(VES威) Users Manual” for detailed operating instructions.
VES威 Remote Control
• Two wireless infrared headsets allow rear seat passengers to listen to the same or individual audio sources.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
250
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Kicker姞 13-speaker High Performance Sound
System with Driver-Selectable Surround (DSS) –
If Equipped
Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the art audio
amplifier that provides 5.1-channel surround sound from
any stereo audio source. A new feature of the Kicker威
audio system offers the ability to choose surround sound
for any audio source or video source.
“Video Surround” is optimized for rear-seat passengers
watching a video, and “Audio Surround” is optimized
for front-seat passengers for any audio source. This
surround effect is available for audio from any source –
AM/FM/CD/ Satellite Radio or Video / Video / AUX –
and is activated through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to “Driver-Selectable Surround
Sound (DSS)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
DSS modes for audio sources are “Stereo” and “Audio
Surround,” which is surround sound equalized for the
front seat occupants. The “Video Surround” mode is
described under “Kicker威 Mobile Surround (KMS1).威”
Please note that DSS effects are dependent on the mix of
the original recording. Some audio will sound better in
DSS modes, others in Stereo mode.
When in “Audio Surround” mode, balance is set automatically. Fader control is available to add more surround audio if desired.
Kicker姞 Mobile Surround (KMS1)姞 – If Equipped
The VES威 for this vehicle comes equipped with Kicker
Mobile Surround (KMS1).威 This feature offers the ultimate movie experience by providing surround sound
uniquely equalized for the interior space of your vehicle.
The KMS1威 Video Surround mode activates whenever a
video source is selected, unless the system is already in
“Audio Surround” mode. DSS modes for video sources
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
are “Stereo,” “Audio Surround,” and “Video Surround.”
When in Video Surround mode, balance and fade are set
automatically by the KMS1威 system to provide the
ultimate surround sound experience.
251
Using this feature,
• the iPod威 audio can be played on the vehicle’s sound
system, providing metadata (Track Title, Artist, Album, etc.) information display on radio.
UNIVERSAL CONSUMER INTERFACE (UCI) — IF
EQUIPPED
• the iPod威 can be controlled using the radio buttons to
Play, Browse and List the iPod威 contents.
NOTE: This section is for sales code RES and REQ
radios only with UConnect威. For sales code REN touch
screen radio, refer to the separate User’s Manual.
• the iPod威 battery charges when plugged into the UCI
connector.
This feature allows you to plug an iPod威 mobile digital
device into the vehicle’s sound system through a connector (UCI connector) using an optional connection cable
(available through MOPAR威). See your authorized dealer
for details.
Connecting The iPod姞 Device
Use the optional connection cable to connect an iPod威 to
the vehicle’s UCI connector (which is located in the glove
box on some vehicles. This location may vary with
vehicle). Once the iPod威 is connected and synchronized
to the vehicle system (this may take a few seconds to
connect), the vehicle brand logo appears on the iPod威
display, and it starts charging and is ready for use by
pressing radio switches as described below.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
252
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Controlling The iPod姞 Using Radio Buttons
To get into the UCI (iPod威) mode and access a connected
iPod威, press the AUX button on the radio faceplate. Once
in the UCI (iPod威) mode, the iPod威 audio track (if
available from iPod威) will start playing over the vehicle
audio system.
Play Mode
When switched to UCI mode the iPod威 will be in Play
mode. In Play mode, you may use the following buttons
on the radio faceplate to control the iPod威 and display
data:
Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click while playing
a track skips to the next track.
Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click
during the first two seconds of the track will jump to the
previous track in the list and turning this button at any
other time in the track will jump to the beginning of the
current track.
RW (Rewind) Button
Press and hold the RW button to move backward in the
current track. Holding the RW button long enough will
take you back to the beginning of the current track.
TUNE/SCROLL Knob
Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to go to the next or
previous track.
Pressing and releasing the RW button will go back five
seconds of the current track.
The TUNE/SCROLL knob functions similar to the scroll
wheel on the iPod威 mobile digital device.
FF (Fast Forward) Button
Press and hold the FF button to move forward in the
current track.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
253
Pressing and releasing the FF button will go forward five
seconds of the current track.
of the screens, the last press of the INFO button will take
you back to the Play mode screen on the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Use the SEEK buttons to move to the previous or the next
track.
REPEAT Button
Press the REPEAT button to repeat the current playing
track.
If the left (down) button is pressed during the first two
seconds of the current track, it will go back to the
previous track in the list; if you press this button at any
other time in the current track it will go back to the
beginning of the track.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button will play the first five seconds
of each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop the SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, press the SCAN button again.
If the right (up) button is pressed during Play mode, it
will go to the next track in the list.
During the SCAN mode, you can also press the SEEK
button to the left or right to go to the previous or next
tracks.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button while a track is playing to see the
information (Track Title, Artist, Album, etc.) for that
track. Each press of the INFO button will take you to the
next screen of data for that track. Once you have seen all
RND (Random) Button (RES Radios Only)
Pressing the RND button will switch between the shuffle
on and shuffle off modes of the iPod威. If the RND icon is
showing on the radio display then the shuffle mode is on.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
254
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
List or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the following buttons
will take you to List mode. List mode enables you to
scroll through the list of menus and tracks on the iPod威
device.
During all List modes, the iPod威 will display all lists in
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track you wish to select is
at the bottom of the list, you just turn the TUNE/
SCROLL knob backward (counterclockwise) to get to the
track faster.
TUNE/SCROLL Knob
In the List mode, the TUNE/SCROLL knob functions in
a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the iPod威.
Radio Preset Buttons
In the List mode, the radio preset buttons are used as
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 device.
Turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob clockwise (forward)
and counterclockwise (backward) scrolls through lists,
displaying the track detail on the radio display. Once you
have the track to be played highlighted on the radio
display, press the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select and
start playing the track. By turning the TUNE/SCROLL
knob fast, you can jump through the list faster. During
fast scroll, you may notice a slight delay in updating the
information on the radio display.
• 1 – Playlists
• 2 – Artists
• 3 – Albums
• 4 – Genres
• 5 - Audiobooks
• 6 – Podcasts
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
After pressing a preset button, you will see the list you
are in on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
To exit the List mode without selecting a track, press the
same preset button again to go back to Play mode.
255
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located on the
surface of the steering wheel at the 3 and 9 o’clock
positions.
LIST Button
Pressing the LIST button will take to the top level menu
of the iPod威. This takes you to the same top level menu
as on your iPod威. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to list
the top menu item you wish to select and then press the
TUNE/SCROLL knob. This will take you to the next sub
menu list item of the iPod威 and you can follow the same
steps to go to the desired track in that list. Not all iPod威
sub menu levels are available on this system.
MUSIC TYPE Button
The MUSIC TYPE button is another shortcut button to
the genre listing on your iPod威.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
256
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicles equipped with steering wheel-mounted buttons
are also equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC). The EVIC features a driver-interactive
display. This is located in the instrument cluster below
the speedometer.
VOLUME
Button
The VOLUME button controls the sound level
of the sound system. Press the top of the
VOLUME button to increase the sound level.
Press the bottom of the VOLUME button to
decrease the sound level.
Press the AUDIO MODE button to select the
Compass/Temp/Audio screen. This screen
displays radio and media mode information
AUDIO depending on which radio is in the vehicle.
MODE
Button
If the Compass/Temp/Audio screen is already displayed
when the AUDIO MODE button is pressed, then the
mode will change (i.e., from AM to FM, to Media mode,
etc., depending on which radio is in the vehicle).
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the FUNCTION SELECT
button to operate various radio, media, and
FUNC- Universal Customer Interface (UCI) functions
TION (i.e., advance presets, select next folder, jump to
SELECT or start playing songs in playlists, etc., dependButton ing on which radio is in the vehicle and if
equipped with UCI).
When the EVIC is in the Compass/Temp/
Audio screen, press the SCROLL button to seek
up and down radio stations, tracks, chapters,
SCROLL files, etc., depending on which radio is in the
Button vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
257
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
258
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
Blower Control
The rotary knob on the left controls the
blower. The control has an OFF position and four speed settings. The
blower will remain on until the control is turned to the OFF position or
the ignition is turned OFF.
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating System
Manual Temperature Controls
Temperature Control
The rotary knob in the center controls
air temperature. Rotate the control to
the left for cooler air temperature and
to the right for warmer air temperature. Rotating the control to the extreme left provides the coldest setting.
Rotating the control to the extreme
right provides the warmest setting.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Mode Control
The rotary knob on the right controls
airflow distribution. Dots between
each of the mode selections identify
intermediate modes that allow the operator to fine-tune airflow distribution. The mode settings are as follows:
• Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side
window demister grilles.
NOTE: To improve fuel economy, leave in defrost only
when necessary.
• Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air
259
is also directed to the front door windows through the
side window demister grilles.
• Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
the instrument panel and into the rear seating
area through vents under the front seats.
• Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and through the outlets located
on the floor. Air flows through the registers in the back
of the center console to the rear seat passengers. These
registers can be closed to partially block airflow.
• Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in
the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
260
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Recirculation Control
The mode control knob also controls the
recirculation feature. You can choose BiLevel Recirculation air outlets, Panel Recirculation air outlets, or a mix or both while in
this mode. Normally, air enters from outside the
vehicle. However, when in Recirculation mode air
inside the vehicle is re-used. Use this mode to cool the
inside of the vehicle rapidly. The Recirculation mode
can also be used to temporarily block out outside
odors, smoke, and dust.
Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to turn on and turn off the air
conditioning. When the air conditioning is turned
on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the
outlets selected with the mode control. Press this button
a second time to turn off the air conditioning. An LED in
the button will illuminate when compressor operation is
selected.
Automatic Temperature Control — If Equipped
Automatic Temperature Controls
Automatic Operation
The Infrared Dual-Zone Climate Control System automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle
at the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
To accomplish this, the system gathers information from
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the controls on the climate control, from a dual sunsensor located in the top of the instrument panel, from an
infrared sensor located in the face of the climate control,
and from various sensors located throughout the vehicle.
The controls on the climate control provide the system
with operator input. The dual sun-sensor monitors sun
load coming through the windshield. The infrared sensor
independently measures the surface temperature of the
driver and passenger. Other sensors take into account
vehicle-speed, A/C pressure, outside temperature, and
engine cooling temperature. Using all of these inputs, the
system automatically adjusts airflow temperature, airflow distribution, airflow volume, and the amount of
outside air recirculation. This maintains a comfortable
temperature even under changing conditions.
Operation of the system is quite simple. Begin by turning
the mode control knob (on the right) to AUTO, and place
the blower control knob (on the left) to either LO AUTO
261
or HI AUTO. The LO AUTO position should be used for
front seat occupants only. The HI AUTO position should
be used when more airflow is desired, or when rear seat
occupants are present. Then, dial in the temperature you
would like the system to maintain by rotating the driver
or passenger temperature control knob. Once the comfort
level is selected, the system will maintain that level
automatically using the heating system. Should the desired comfort level require air conditioning, the system
will automatically make the adjustment.
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
the OFF position on the fan control stops the system
completely and closes the outside air intake.
72°F (22°C) is the recommended setting for maximum
comfort for the average person; however, this may vary.
NOTE: The temperature setting can be adjusted at any
time without affecting automatic operation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
262
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air conditioning in this system is automatic.
Pressing the air conditioning control button while
in AUTO mode will cause the LED in the control
button to flash three times and then turn off. This
indicates that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the air conditioning is not necessary.
The system will automatically control recirculation. However, pressing the recirculation control button will temporarily put the system in
recirculation mode (10 minutes). This can be
used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors,
dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the control button to illuminate. After 10 minutes, the system will return to normal
AUTO mode function and the LED will turn off.
NOTE:
• The surface of the climate control panel and the top
center of the instrument panel should be kept free of
debris due to the location of the climate control
sensors. Mud on the windshield may also cause poor
operation of this system.
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
to fog. If the interior of the windows begin to fog, press
the recirculation button to return to outside air. Some
temp/humidity conditions will cause captured interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility.
For this reason, the system will not allow recirculation
to be selected while in defrost or defrost/floor mode.
Attempting to use the recirculation while in these
modes will cause the LED in the control button to
blink and then turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of blower preferred automatic,
mode preferred automatic, or blower and mode preferred
automatic. This means the operator can override the
blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
263
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the blower control knob (on the left).
NOTE: Please read the automatic temperature control
operation chart that follows for details.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
264
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
• Defrost
Air is directed to the windshield through the
outlets at the base of the windshield. Air is also
directed to the front door windows through the side
window demister grilles.
• Defrost/Floor
Air flows through the front and rear floor outlets
and the outlets at the base of the windshield. Air
is also directed to the front door windows
through the side window demister grilles.
• Floor
Air flows through the floor outlets located under
the instrument panel and into the rear seating
area through vents under the front seats.
265
• Bi-Level
Air flows through the outlets located in the
instrument panel and through the outlets located
on the floor. Air flows through the registers in the back
of the center console to the rear seat passengers. These
registers can be closed to block airflow.
• Panel
Air flows through the outlets located in the instrument panel. Air flows through the registers in
the back of the center console to the rear seat passengers. These registers can be closed to block airflow.
• Air Conditioning Control
Press this button to turn on the air conditioning
during manual operation only. When the air conditioning is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow
through the outlets selected with the Mode control dial.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
266
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press this button a second time to turn off the air
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
manual compressor operation is selected.
NOTE: To control the air conditioning manually, the
mode selector must be moved out of the AUTO position.
• Recirculation Control
This button can be used to block out smoke,
odors, dust, high humidity, or if rapid cooling
is desired. The recirculation mode should only
be used temporarily. An LED in the button
illuminates when the recirculation mode is active. You
may use this feature separately.
NOTE: Extended use of recirculation may cause the
windows to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to
fog, press the Recirculation button to return to outside
air. Some temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
interior air to condense on windows and hamper visibility. For this reason, the system will not allow Recirculation to be selected while in defrost or defrost/floor mode.
Attempting to use the recirculation while in these modes
will cause the LED in the control button to blink and then
turn off.
Operating Tips
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A 50% solution of ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant in water is recommended. Refer
to “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7 for proper
coolant selection.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
267
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation mode during Winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
Vacation Storage
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service
(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
fresh air and high blower setting. This will insure adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility of
compressor damage when the system is started again.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for
long periods, as fogging may occur.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The climate control system filters outside air containing
dust, pollen and some odors. Strong odors cannot be
totally filtered out. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
Section 7 for filter replacement instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
268
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
269
CAUTION!
Rear Wiper Operation
The rear wiper is operated by the rear wiper/
washer switch. The switch is located in the switch
bank near the top center of the instrument panel. An
indicator in the switch illuminates when the rear wiper is
on.
To use the rear wiper, push the left side of the rear
wiper/washer switch in and release.
The rear wiper system is intermittent, and is not adjustable. The delay is approximately eight to nine seconds
between cycles.
Turn the rear wiper OFF when driving through an
automatic car wash. Damage to the rear wiper may
result if the wiper switch is left in any position other
than OFF.
4
Rear Washer Operation
The rear washer is operated by the rear wiper/
washer switch. The switch is located in the switch
bank near the top center of the instrument panel.
To use the rear washer, push the right side of the rear
wiper/washer switch in and hold while spray is desired
(maximum spray of 10 seconds). The rear wiper operates
for two wipe cycles after the switch is released.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
270
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer and rear window washer share
the same fluid reservoir. The reservoir is located in the
front of the engine compartment on the passenger side of
the vehicle. Be sure to check the fluid level at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual water.
The washer fluid reservoir will hold 1 gal (4 l) of fluid
when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
271
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors of the
rear window defroster, do not use scrapers, sharp
instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on the
interior surface of the window.
Electric Rear Window Defroster
The Electric Rear Window Defroster control is
located on the climate control. Press this button to
turn ON the rear window defroster and the heated
outside rearview mirrors (if equipped). An LED in the
button will illuminate when the rear window defroster is
ON. The defroster automatically turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For five more minutes of operation,
press of the button again.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Normal Starting (Tip Start) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
▫ Automatic Transmission — General
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . . 284
▫ 5-Speed Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . 285
▫ Extremely Cold Weather
(Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
䡵 AutoStick威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
▫ AutoStick威 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ AutoStick威 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 291
䡵 Engine Block Heater — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 281
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
䡵 Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
274
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
▫ Synchronizing ESP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light And
ESP/TCS Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
▫ ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ TCS (Traction Control System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ ESP (Electronic Stability Program) . . . . . . . . . 303
䡵 Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . 311
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . 312
䡵 Tires — General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
▫ Radial-Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
275
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
▫ 6.1L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Alignment And Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Tire Rotation — Standard Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Tire Rotation — All Season Tires . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Base System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 332
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
276
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . . . 344
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
▫ Overloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
䡵 Recreational Towing (Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . 361
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
䡵 Ground Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust the
inside and outside mirrors, fasten your seat belt, and if
present, instruct all other occupants to buckle their seat
belts.
277
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave animals or children inside parked vehicles in hot weather; interior heat buildup may cause
serious injury or death.
• Be sure to turn OFF the engine and remove the key
from the ignition switch if you want to rest or sleep in
your car. Accidents can be caused by inadvertently
moving the shift lever. Accidents can also be caused
by pressing the accelerator pedal. This may cause
excessive heat in the exhaust system, resulting in
overheating and vehicle fire, which may cause serious
or fatal injuries.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
278
STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission
The shift lever must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting into any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Normal Starting (Tip Start)
NOTE: Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or depressing the
accelerator pedal.
279
Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
Do not press the accelerator. Use the Fob with Integrated
Key to briefly turn the ignition switch to the START
position and release it as soon as the starter engages. The
starter motor will continue to run, and it will disengage
automatically when the engine is running. If the engine
fails to start, the starter will disengage automatically in 10
seconds. If this occurs, turn the ignition switch to the
LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
normal starting procedure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
280
STARTING AND OPERATING
If Engine Fails To Start
WARNING!
• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into
the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to
start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire
causing serious personal injury.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned
fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once
the engine has started, ignite and damage the
converter and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to
obtain a start from a booster battery or the battery
in another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Section 6 for
proper jump-starting procedures and follow them
carefully.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” or “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. To clear any excess fuel, push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the START position and
release it as soon as the starter engages. The starter motor
will disengage automatically in 10 seconds. Once this
occurs, release the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then
repeat the normal starting procedure.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, wait 10 to 15
seconds before trying again.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
decrease as the engine warms up.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms engine coolant and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord
to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on
the driver side of the vehicle. It has a removable cap that
is located on the driver side of the Integrated Power
Module.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the cord before driving.
Damage to the 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
281
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
282
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Shift lever position
WARNING!
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
Automatic Transmission — General Information
The automatic transmission selects individual gears automatically, dependent upon:
• Altitude
• Vehicle loading
• Driving style
• Accelerator position
• Vehicle speed
The gear shifting process is continuously adapted, dependent on the driving style, the driving situation, and
the road characteristics.
NOTE:
• After selecting any driving position, wait a moment to
allow the gear to engage fully before accelerating,
especially when the engine is cold.
• If there is a need to restart the engine, be sure to cycle
the key to the LOCK position before restarting. Transmission engagement may be delayed up to 10 seconds
after restart if the key is not cycled to the LOCK
position first.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
• The electronically-controlled transmission provides a
precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating. Therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt or soft until after the
break-in period. This is a normal condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
The shift lever is automatically locked while in the PARK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the brake pedal must be firmly depressed before
the shift lock will release.
Move the shift lever to the desired position only when the
engine is idling normally and the brake pedal is applied.
Do not release the brake pedal until ready to drive. The
vehicle may otherwise accelerate quickly when the shift
lever is in DRIVE or REVERSE position.
283
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the transmission into PARK, remove the key
from the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once
the key is removed from the ignition, the transmission shift lever is locked in the PARK position,
securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
Furthermore, you should never leave unattended
children inside a vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
284
STARTING AND OPERATING
Over-Temperature Mode
The transmission electronics constantly monitor the transmission oil temperature. If the transmission exceeds normal operating temperature, the transmission will change
the way it shifts to help control the condition. This may
result in a slightly different feeling or response during
normal operation in DRIVE position. After the transmission cools down, it will return to normal operation.
system malfunction occurs (i.e., dead battery). To access
the override, remove the rubber tray from the storage bin
located to the right of the shift lever. The override access
port is at the top of the bin to the right of the shift lever
gate.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in the
PARK position when the ignition switch is in the LOCK
position. To move the shift lever out of the PARK
position, the ignition switch must be turned to the ON
position, and the brake pedal must be depressed.
BTSI Override
There is an override for the BTSI that allows you to move
the shift lever out of the PARK position if an electrical
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Brake Interlock Override
STARTING AND OPERATING
285
To activate the override, first insert the key into the
ignition switch and turn it to the ACC or ON position.
Then, press the pink-colored tab trough the access pot
with a small flat blade screwdriver or alike. While
pressing the override, move the shift lever out of the
PARK position. When complete, return the rubber tray to
its original position.
5-Speed Automatic Transmission
Shifting from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE should be
done only after the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
pedal when moving the shift lever between these gears.
5
Shift Lever
Gear Ranges
PARK
PARK supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
286
STARTING AND OPERATING
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first, and then apply the parking brake.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever in the PARK position:
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise
the load on the transmission locking mechanism may
make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on an
uphill grade.
• When shifting into PARK, move the shift lever all the
way forward until it stops and is fully seated.
WARNING!
Never use PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
• Look at the shift indicator display on the instrument
panel to ensure it is in the P position.
CAUTION!
Damage to the shifter could result if the shift lever is
moved out of PARK before the ignition is turned
from the LOCK to ON position.
REVERSE
Shift into REVERSE gear only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
NEUTRAL
In NEUTRAL, no power is transmitted from the engine to
the drive axle. When the brakes are released, the vehicle
can be moved freely (pushed or towed). Do not engage
NEUTRAL position while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g., on icy roads).
The engine may be started in this range. Use this range
for starting your vehicle if it is moving or being towed.
CAUTION!
Coasting the vehicle or driving for any other reason
with the shift lever in NEUTRAL can result in
transmission damage.
287
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have an accident.
DRIVE
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and downshifts and the best fuel economy.
The transmission automatically upshifts through 5th
gear. The DRIVE position provides optimum driving
characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
288
STARTING AND OPERATING
When frequent transmission shifting occurs when using
the Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, traveling
into strong head winds, or while towing heavy trailers, use
the AutoStick威 mode and select the “3” range.
AutoStick威 Gear Selection
The AutoStick威 feature can be selected by pressing the
shift lever to the right or the left with the lever in the
DRIVE position. The gear currently selected is indicated
in the instrument cluster display. Briefly, press the shift
lever in the “D -” direction and the transmission will shift
from the current gear to the next lower gear.
Press and hold the shift lever in the “D-” direction and
the transmission will shift from the current gear directly
to the next lowest gear for best acceleration.
NOTE: To avoid overrevving the engine when the shift
lever is moved in “D -” direction, the transmission will
not shift to a lower gear if the engine’s revolutions per
minute (RPM) limit would be exceeded.
Briefly press the shift lever in the “D +” direction and the
transmission will shift from the current gear to the next
higher gear.
Press and hold the shift lever in the “D +” direction and
the transmission will shift from the current gear directly
to gear “D.”
WARNING!
On slippery road surfaces never downshift in order
to obtain braking action. This could result in drive
wheel slip and reduced vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent this type of loss of control.
You could lose control of your vehicle and have an
accident.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
289
Delayed Shifts in Cold Temperatures
During cold temperature operation, you may notice
delayed upshifts depending on engine and transmission
temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency.
A reset feature is available to allow the vehicle to be
driven to an authorized dealer for service. To reset the
transmission, use the following procedure:
Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode
The transmission is monitored for abnormal conditions.
If a condition is detected that could result in transmission
damage, the transmission will engage Limp Home Mode.
If vehicle acceleration worsens, or the transmission no
longer shifts, the transmission is most likely operating in
the Limp Home Mode. In this mode, the transmission
will remain in the current gear until the vehicle is
brought to a stop. After the vehicle has stopped, PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Second gear will operate in the DRIVE position. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.
3. Turn OFF the engine.
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Move the shift lever to the PARK position.
4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Move the shift lever to the desired range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will
return to normal operation.
NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recommend that you visit your authorized dealer at your
earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has
diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could
recur.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
290
STARTING AND OPERATING
Have the transmission checked at your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
If the problem has been momentary, the transmission can
be reset to regain all forward gears.
Permanent Transmission Limp Home Mode
Permanent Limp Home Mode will be activated if the
transmission enters temporary Limp Home Mode three
times. Follow the reset procedure described under “Temporary Transmission Limp Home Mode” in this section.
In Permanent Limp Home Mode, PARK, REVERSE, and
NEUTRAL will continue to operate. Second gear will
operate in the DRIVE position. The Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) may illuminate.
AUTOSTICK姞
Autostick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting to provide you with more control of
the vehicle. Autostick威 allows you to maximize engine
braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance. This system
can also provide you with more control during passing,
city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Autostick姞 Operation
By placing the shift lever in the DRIVE position, it can be
moved from side to side. This allows the driver to select
a higher or lower range of gears. Moving the shift lever to
the Left (-) triggers a downshift and to the Right (+) an
upshift. The gear position will display in the instrument
cluster on the transmission range indicator.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• In Autostick威 mode, the transmission will only shift
up and down when the driver manually moves the
shift lever Right (D+) or Left (D-).
• An UPSHIFT message will appear in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) portion of the instrument cluster when using Autostick威. This message
appears in order to alert the driver to upshift to the
next gear. The UPSHIFT message will display while
operating the vehicle at higher engine revolutions per
minute (RPM).
You can shift in or out of the Autostick威 mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. When
you wish to engage Autostick威, simply move the shift
lever to the Right (D+) or Left (D-) while in the DRIVE
position. The transmission will remain in the current gear
until an upshift or downshift is chosen. When you wish
to disengage Autostick威, hold the shift lever to the right
291
for at least one second. The transmission will now
operate automatically, shifting between the five available
gears.
Autostick姞 General Information
• You can start out in 1st or 2nd gear. The system will
ignore attempts to upshift at too low of a vehicle
speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to 1st
gear when coming to a stop.
• Starting out in 2nd gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
• Avoid using speed control when Autostick威 is engaged.
• The transmission will not automatically shift up when
maximum engine speed is reached while Autostick威 is
engaged.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
292
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
Autostick威 is engaged.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the rear wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the rear
(driving) wheels.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear
wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and
possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause
partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping
ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precautions should be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are
slushy.
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
millimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
293
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
Flowing/Rising Water
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not drive on, or cross, a road or a path where
water is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off).
Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s
surface and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper
water. Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can
carry your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water, and if there are any obstacles
in the way, before driving through the standing
water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
294
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination
(i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance)
after driving through standing water. Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid appears
contaminated, as this may result in further damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph (8
km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
The parking brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use PARK position on an automatic transmission as a substitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
When parking on a flat surface, place the shift lever in the
PARK position first and then apply the parking brake.
295
When parking on a hill, it is important to apply the
parking brake before placing the shift lever in PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of
PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels
toward the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
The foot operated parking brake is positioned below the
lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the
parking brake, push the parking brake pedal down and
then remove your foot from the pedal. To release the
parking brake, push down on the parking brake pedal
and then release.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
296
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Don’t leave the keys in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Parking Brake
The brake light in the instrument cluster will turn on
when the parking brake is applied and the ignition
switch is ON.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. There will be some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This may be evident
by increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential
activation of the Brake Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason (for
example, repeated brake applications with the engine off)
the brakes will still function. The effort required to brake
the vehicle will be much greater than that required with
the power system operating.
297
Anti-Lock Brake System
The Anti-Lock Brake System provides increased vehicle
stability and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically “pumps” the
brakes during severe braking conditions to prevent
wheel lock-up.
The electronic brake force distribution (EBD) prevents the
rear wheels from over-braking and provides greater
control of available braking forces applied to the rear
axle.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self check cycle to ensure that the ABS system
is working properly. This self check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
298
STARTING AND OPERATING
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You also may experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-lock:
• The ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop),
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves,
• Brake pedal pulsations, and
• A slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The Anti-Lock Brake System contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference
caused by improperly installed or high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss
of anti-lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should be performed by qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish their effectiveness and may lead to an accident. Pumping makes the
stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your brake
pedal when you need to slow down or stop.
• Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, following another vehicle too
closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of others.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
Anti-Lock Brake Light
The ABS light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System. The light will come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
299
If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Light
remain on, the Anti-Lock brakes (ABS) and Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
300
STARTING AND OPERATING
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced electronic
brake control system commonly referred to as ESP. This
system includes the ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System), the
TCS (Traction Control System), the BAS (Brake Assist
System), and the ESP (Electronic Stability Program).
These systems work together to enhance both vehicle
stability and control in various driving conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions by controlling hydraulic brake pressure. This prevents wheel lock-up to help
avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking. For
more information about ABS, refer to “Anti-Lock Brake
System” in Section 5.
301
WARNING!
The ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. The ABS cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ABS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
302
STARTING AND OPERATING
TCS (Traction Control System)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each
driven wheel. If wheel spin is detected, brake pressure is
applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is
reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and stability.
stopping sequence. Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
This system complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) by optimizing the vehicle braking capability during emergency braking maneuvers. This system detects
an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies optimum
pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce braking
distances.
The BAS (Brake Assist System) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. The BAS cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive speed in
turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents. The capabilities of a BASequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS
assistance. To receive the benefits of this system, you
must apply continuous brake pedal pressure during the
WARNING!
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. The ESP
corrects for oversteering and understeering the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate wheel. Engine
power may also be reduced to assist in counteracting the
condition of oversteer or understeer and help the vehicle
maintain the desired path.
The ESP uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the path
that the driver intends to steer the vehicle and compares
it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual path
does not match the intended path, the ESP applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the condition of oversteer or understeer.
303
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light,⬙ located in the
instrument cluster, starts to flash as soon as the
tires lose traction and the ESP system becomes
active. The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ also
flashes when TCS is active. If the ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator
Light⬙ begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
304
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The ESP (Electronic Stability Program) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions. The ESP cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or
hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
driver can prevent accidents. The capabilities of an
ESP-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
The ESP system has 3 available operating modes:
ESP On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESP. Whenever
the vehicle is started, the ESP system will be in this mode.
This mode should be used for most all driving situations.
The ESP should only be turned off for specific reasons as
noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a
more spirited driving experience is desired. It is also
intended for driving in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This
mode disables the TCS portion of the ESP and raises the
threshold for ESP activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than what ESP normally allows.
The “ESP OFF” button is located in the switch
bank near the top center of the instrument
panel. To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily depress the “ESP OFF” button and the
⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ will illuminate. To turn the
ESP ON again, momentarily depress the ⬙ESP OFF⬙
button and the ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ will turn off.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or when starting-off in deep snow,
sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the
“Partial Off” mode by momentarily depressing the “ESP
OFF” button. Once the situation requiring “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn the ESP ON again by momentarily depressing the “ESP OFF” button. This may be
done while the vehicle is in motion.
Full Off
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
only and should not be used on any public roadways. In
this mode, all TCS and ESP stability features are turned
off. To enter the “Full Off” mode, depress and hold the
“ESP OFF” button for five seconds while the vehicle is
stopped with the engine running. After five seconds, a
chime will sound, the ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ will
illuminate, and the ⬙ESP OFF⬙ message will display in the
vehicle odometer. Press and release the TRIP ODOMETER button located on the instrument cluster to clear
305
this message. The “ESP OFF” message may appear in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4. To turn ESP ON again, momentarily depress the
⬙ESP OFF Button.⬙
NOTE: The ⬙ESP OFF,⬙ or “ESP System Deactivated”
message will display and the audible chime will sound
when the gear selector is moved into the PARK position
from any position other than PARK and then moved out
of the PARK position. This will occur when the message
was previously cleared.
WARNING!
In the ESP Full Off mode, the engine torque reduction and stability features are cancelled. Therefore,
the enhanced vehicle stability offered by ESP is
unavailable.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
306
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: When the ESP is switched off a feature of the
system remains active. This feature controls wheel spin
across an axle quite similarly to a limited slip differential.
If one wheel on an axle is spinning faster than the other,
the system will apply the brake of the spinning wheel
and allow more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. To improve the vehicle’s traction
when driving with tire chains, or when starting-off in
deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to switch
to the “Partial Off” mode by momentarily depressing the
“ESP OFF” button.
WARNING!
With the ESP switched off, the enhanced vehicle
stability offered by ESP is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESP system will not
engage to assist in maintaining stability. The “Full
Off” ESP mode is intended for off-highway or offroad only.
Synchronizing ESP
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with BAS indicator. If the power
supply is interrupted (battery disconnected or
discharged), the ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light may illuminate with the engine running. If this
should occur, turn the steering wheel completely to the
left and then to the right. The ESP/BAS Malfunction
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
307
Indicator Light should go out. However, if the light
remains on, have the ESP and BAS checked at your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
ESP is synchronized (refer to Synchronizing ESP), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light and
ESP/TCS Indicator Light
The Malfunction Indicator Light for the ESP is
combined with the BAS indicator. The yellow
“ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” and
the yellow “ESP/TCS Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster both come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position. They should go out
with the engine running.
NOTE:
• ⬙The ⬙ESP/TCS Indicator Light⬙ and the ⬙ESP/BAS
Malfunction Indicator Light⬙ will turn on momentarily
each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
The system will turn the “ESP/BAS Malfunction Indicator Light” on continuously while the engine running if it
detects a malfunction in either the ESP or the BAS or
both. If the light remains on after several ignition cycles
and you have driven the vehicle several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), and the
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be on even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
308
STARTING AND OPERATING
• European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
• LT (Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
NOTE:
• P (Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards, and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
309
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%).
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
—⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
310
STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions
—The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions,
and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
311
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
312
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on either the face of the driver’s door or the driver’s side
B-pillar.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
313
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
314
STARTING AND OPERATING
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (295
kg) {(since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs (295
kg)}.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in Step 4.
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
NOTE: For the following example, the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392
kg).
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
315
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
316
STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can cause
damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Economy—
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Under-inflation, also increases
tire rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
317
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
ride.
5
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed either on
the face of the driver’s door or on the driver’s side
B-pillar.
Some vehicles may have supplemental tire pressure
information for vehicle loads that are less than the
Tire Placard Location
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
318
STARTING AND OPERATING
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1
mi (1 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
319
Radial-Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
320
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
Refer to the paragraph on “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in
Section 6.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30
mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and don’t let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
321
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
• Distance driven
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
322
STARTING AND OPERATING
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension
dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and braking of
your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling
and stress to steering and suspension components.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death. Use only the tire and wheel
sizes with load ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity
than what was originally equipped on your vehicle.
Using a tire with a smaller load index could result in
tire overloading and failure. You could lose control
and have an accident.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer
readings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
• Fast tire wear.
• Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
• Vehicle pull to right or left.
323
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your
authorized dealer for proper diagnosis.
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-ofbalance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
TIRE CHAINS
If driving conditions require tire chains for your vehicle,
use only chains that meet SAE type “Class S” specifications. In addition, only install tire chains on 245/45ZR20
size tires. Contact you local dealership or tire dealer for
these size tires.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
324
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the following
precautions:
• Because of restricted chain clearance between tires and other
suspension components, it is important that only chains in
good condition are used. Broken chains can cause serious
damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that
could indicate chain breakage. Remove the damaged parts of
the chain before further use.
• Install chains on the rear wheels as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about 1⁄2 mi (0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large bumps,
especially with a loaded vehicle.
• Use on rear wheels only.
• Do not drive for prolonged period on dry pavement.
• Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on the
method of installation, operating speed, and conditions for
use. Always use the lower suggested operating speed of the
chain manufacturer if different from the speed recommended by the manufacturer.
NOTE: In order to avoid damage to tires, chains, and
your vehicle do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement. Observe the tire chain manufacturer’s instructions on method of installation, operating speed, and
conditions for usage.
Always use the lower suggested operating speed if both
the chain manufacturer and vehicle manufacturer suggest a maximum speed. This notice applies to all chain
traction devices, including link and cable (radial) chains.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during the winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four. Failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/h).
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear patterns. These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile
with aggressive tread designs such as those on all season
325
type tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels, and contribute to
a smooth, quiet ride.
Follow the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the
recommended tire rotation frequency. Remember, more
frequent rotation is permissible if desired. Also, correct
for anything causing rapid or unusual wear prior to
performing the tire rotation.
Tire Rotation — Standard Tires
The suggested rotation method is the “side-to-side” as
shown in the following diagram.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
326
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Rotation — All Season Tires
The suggested rotation method for vehicles equipped
with all season tires is the “forward-cross” as shown in
the following diagram.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) — IF
EQUIPPED
• The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn
the driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle
recommended cold placard pressure.
• The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as
the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mi (1 km)
after a three hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to the
“Tires – General Information” in this section for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires.
327
The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
• The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
if the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning limit for any reason, including low temperature
effects and natural pressure loss through the tire.
• The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not
turn off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure. Once the low tire
pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure
to the recommended cold placard pressure in order for
the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off.
The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off once
the system receives the updated tire pressures. The
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
328
STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes
above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
− For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three hours)
placard pressure of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire
pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa), a temperature drop to
20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire pressure is
sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle may
cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately 27
psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will still be ON. In this situation, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn
OFF only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure
gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.
329
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
Base System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
330
STARTING AND OPERATING
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The
matching full size spare can be used in place of any of the
four road tires. The TPMS will only monitor the pressure
in the full size spare when it is used in place of a road tire.
Otherwise, a spare with a pressure below the lowpressure limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. Once the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE:
Vehicles with Full Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and
the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) will turn off the TPM Telltale Light, as long as
no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit
in any of the four active road tires.
331
NOTE:
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
332
STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire, and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically and the TPM Telltale
Light will turn OFF, as long as no tire pressure is below
the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active
road tires. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless
technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to
monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure
readings to the receiver module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel-wells)
• Various tire pressure monitoring system messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if
equipped) has a tire pressure monitoring sensor. The full
size spare can be used in place of any of the four road
tires. A spare with a pressure below the low-pressure
limit will not cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light to illuminate or the chime to sound.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime
will sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition, the EVIC
will display one or more low pressure messages (Left
Front, Left Rear, Right Front, Right Rear) for three
seconds and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values flashing.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
333
5
334
STARTING AND OPERATING
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate the tires with low pressure (those flashing in
the EVIC graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically
update, the graphic display in the EVIC will stop flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will
turn off. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10
minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS
to receive this information.
SYSTEM⬙ message for three seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to indicate
which sensor is not being received.
Check TPMS Warning
If a system fault is detected, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, and the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
1. Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as
the TPM sensors.
2. Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains
materials that may block radio wave signals.
3. Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
335
NOTE:
Vehicles with Full Size Spare
1. The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.
2. If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire
that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning limit,
upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will sound and
the TPM Telltale Light will turn ON. In addition, the
EVIC will display a low pressure message and a graphic
showing the low tire pressure value flashing.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (25 km/h) the TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in any of the four active road tires.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
336
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
Vehicles with Compact Spare
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, the TPM Telltale
Light will remain ON and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the EVIC will still display a
flashing pressure value.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 10 minutes above 15
mph (25 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and
off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition,
the EVIC will display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message
for three seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of
the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC will
display a ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙ message for three
seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare,
the TPMS will update automatically. In addition, the
TPM Telltale Light will turn OFF and the graphic in the
EVIC will display a new pressure value instead of dashes
(- -), as long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 10 minutes above
15 mph (25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
6.1L Engine
The 6.1L Engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel economy and performance when
using high-quality premium unleaded
gasoline with an octane rating of 91 or
higher.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
337
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
338
STARTING AND OPERATING
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications, if they are available.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as reformulated gasoline.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and driveability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline or
E85 ethanol blends are not the responsibility of the
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
manufacturer. While MTBE is an oxygenate made from
methanol, it does not have the negative effects of methanol.
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
339
Materials Added to Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
and damage the emissions control system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
340
STARTING AND OPERATING
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to overheat.
If you notice a pungent burning odor or some light
smoke, your engine may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact
your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
341
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the trunk/liftgate closed when driving your
vehicle to prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is located behind the fuel filler door on the
left side of the vehicle. Push in on the left side (near the
edge) of the fuel filler door to access the fuel filler cap. If
the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure the replacement
cap is for use with this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
342
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap).
• A poorly fitting gas cap could let impurities into
the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to turn on.
Gas Cap Tether Hook
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is
running.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.
This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened
343
properly. The Malfunction Indicator Light in the instrument cluster may turn on if the gas cap is not
secured properly. Make sure that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is refueled.
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). If this occurs, tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the problem
continues, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).
Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in Section 7.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
344
STARTING AND OPERATING
VEHICLE LOADING
The load carrying capacity of your vehicle is shown on
the “Vehicle Certification Label.” This information
should be used for passenger and luggage loading as
indicated.
Do not exceed the specified Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label affixed to
the rear of the driver’s door.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front
• Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) rear
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Because the front wheels steer the vehicle, it is
important that you do not exceed the maximum front
or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition can
result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Overloading
The load carrying components (axle, springs, tires,
wheels, etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory
service as long as you do not exceed the GVWR and the
front and rear GAWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
345
Figure out the weight on the front and rear of the vehicle
separately. It is important that you distribute the load
evenly over the front and rear axles.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier axles or suspension
components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s
GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight, axle-by-axle and side-by-side. Store heavier items
down low and be sure you distribute their weight as
evenly as possible. Stow all loose items securely before
driving. If weighing the loaded vehicle shows that you
have exceeded either GAWR, but the total load is within
the specified GVWR, you must redistribute the weight.
Improper weight distribution can have an adverse effect
on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way
the brakes operate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
346
STARTING AND OPERATING
A loaded vehicle is shown in the illustration. Note that
neither the GVWR nor the GAWR capacities have been
exceeded.
EXAMPLE ONLY
Empty Weight
Load (including driver, passengers, and cargo)
Total
GAWR
Front
Rear Axle
Axle
2054 lbs
1805 lbs
(932 kg)
(819 kg)
271 lbs
579 lbs
(123 kg)
(263 kg)
2325 lbs
2384 lbs
(1055 kg) (1081 kg)
2546 lbs
2708 lbs
(1155 kg) (1228 kg)
NOTE: Refer to the “Vehicle Certification Label” affixed
to the rear of the driver’s door for your vehicle’s GVWR
and GAWRs. This table is only an example.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the total
allowable weight of your vehicle. This includes driver,
passengers, cargo, and tongue weight. The total load
must be limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
347
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight of the
trailer plus the weight of all cargo, consumables, and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the
trailer in its ⬙loaded and ready for operation⬙ condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your
fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight
of the trailer must be supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is the
total permissible weight of your vehicle and trailer when
weighed in combination. (Note that GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a
driver.)
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
348
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the maximum
capacity of the front and rear axles. Distribute the load
over the front and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you
do not exceed either front or rear GAWR.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Tongue weight (TW) is the downward force exerted on
the hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be
less than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You
must consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
Frontal area is the maximum height and maximum width
of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically used
for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the
tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used
in accordance with the manufacturers directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more consistent
steering and brake control thereby enhancing towing
safety. The addition of a friction / hydraulic sway control
also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.
Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load
equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle
and trailer configuration / loading to comply with Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
349
WARNING!
• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch
system may reduce handling, stability, braking
performance, and could result in an accident.
• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult with your
hitch and trailer manufacturer or a reputable recreational
vehicle
dealer
for
additional
information.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
350
STARTING AND OPERATING
Weight Distributing Hitch System
Improper Adjustment of Weight Distributing System
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
Your vehicle may be factory equipped for safe towing of
trailers weighing over 2,000 lbs (907 kg) with the optional
Trailer Tow Prep Package. See your authorized dealer for
package content.
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.
351
Trailer Hitch Classification
Class
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium
3,500 lbs (1587 kg)
Duty
Class III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2268 kg)
Class IV - Extra
10,000 lbs (4540 kg)
Heavy Duty
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
352
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
6.1L Automatic
Frontal Area
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
40 sq ft (3.72 sq m)
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer
Wt.)
Up to 2 persons & luggage
3,800 lbs (1724 kg)
Up to 3 persons & luggage
3,000 lbs (1361 kg)
Up to 4 persons & luggage
1,500 lbs (680 kg)
Up to 5 persons & NO luggage 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt.
380 lbs (172 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
it should never exceed the weight referenced on the “Tire
and Loading Information” placard. Refer to “Tire–Safety
Information” in this section.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
353
Trailer and Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer.
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of
many trailer accidents.
5
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
354
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 mi (805 km)
of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your
vehicle.
• During the first 500 mi (805 km) of trailer towing,
limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and that it will not shift during travel. When trailering cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load
shifts can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance, or damage to
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure, or tires.
355
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
PARK. Always, block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
356
STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
(This requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight.)
Towing Requirements — Tires
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires–General Information” in this section for information on tire pressures and for proper tire inflation
procedures.
− Also, check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Information” in this section for information on tread wear
indicators and for the proper inspection procedure.
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Information” in this section for information on replacement
tires and for the proper tire replacement procedures.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity
will not increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over 1,000
lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of 2,000
lbs (907 kg).
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
357
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and cause it to fail. You might not have brakes
when you need them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stopping distance. When towing, you should allow for additional
space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
of you. Failure to do so could result in an accident.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
358
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4- and 7-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
4-Pin Connector
STARTING AND OPERATING
359
Towing Tips — Automatic Transmission
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the
“3” range should be selected.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also
provide better engine braking.
7-Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45
minutes of continuous operation, then change the automatic transmission fluid and filter according to the
interval specified for “police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing” in the Maintenance Schedule.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
360
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips — Electronic Speed Control (If
Equipped)
− Don’t use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until
you can get back to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Towing Tips — Autostick威 (If Equipped)
− By using the Autostick威 modes and selecting a specific
gear range, frequent shifting can be avoided. The
highest gear range should be selected that allows for
adequate performance. For example, choose “4” if the
desired speed can be maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
− Extended driving at high RPM should be avoided to
prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in vehicle
speed may be required to avoid extended driving at
high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
Towing Tips — Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods, put transmission in “N”
(Neutral) and increase engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
− Refer to “Cooling System” under “Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
361
GROUND CLEARANCE
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER
VEHICLE (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On
The Ground)
Recreational towing for this vehicle is not recommended.
NOTE: If the vehicle requires towing, make sure all four
wheels are off the ground.
CAUTION!
Damage to the front and rear fascias can occur if you
disregard the low ground clearance in the front and
rear of this vehicle. Pay close attention when parking
to avoid running into parking curbs. Exercise caution
when entering or exiting steep driveways or when
pulling off the road onto soft shoulders.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
5
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
䡵 TIREFIT Tire Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
With A Tow Dolly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
6
364
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The HAZARD switch is located in the switch bank
near the top center of the instrument panel. Depress the switch to activate the flashers. When
activated, all directional turn signals will flash on and off
to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the
switch a second time to turn off the flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it should not
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for
other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
hazard warning flashers will continue to operate even
though the ignition switch is in the LOCK position.
NOTE: With extended use, the hazard earning flashers
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the temperature
control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor, and
the Fan control to HI. This allows the heater core to act as
a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
365
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads 240°F
(116°C) or greater pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range 200–
230°F (93–110°C). If the pointer remains at 240°F
(116°C) or greater and you hear a chime, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7 and follow the
warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap
paragraph.
TIREFIT TIRE REPAIR
Small punctures, particularly those in the tread, can be
sealed with TIREFIT. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. TIREFIT can
be used in outside temperatures down to approximately
-4°F (-20°C).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
6
366
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
The TIREFIT system is located under a hinged access
cover in the load floor in the cargo area.
TIREFIT contents
TIREFIT Location
1.
2.
3.
4.
Air pump hose
Power plug and cable
AIR PUMP switch
Pressure gauge
5. TIREFIT sealant bottle
6. TIREFIT sealant hose
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Sealing tire with TIREFIT
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to repair a tire on the side of the vehicle close
to traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of
being hit when operating the jack or repairing a tire.
• Cuts or punctures larger than approximately 0.16 in. (4 mm),
tire damage caused by driving with extremely low tire pressure or on a flat tire, or a damaged wheel can pose a hazard
while driving. TIREFIT should not be used in such circumstances. Do not drive the vehicle under such circumstances.
Contact your nearest authorized dealer for assistance.
• Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT to come in
contact with hair, eyes or clothing. TIREFIT is harmful if
inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed through the skin: It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation. Any contact with eyes or
skin should be flushed immediately with plenty of water. If
clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT, change clothing as
soon as possible.
• In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If swallowed,
rinse mouth immediately with plenty of water and drink
plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting! Consult a physician
immediately.
• Keep away from open flame or heat source.
367
1. Move the transmission shift lever to the PARK position, turn off the engine, and set the parking brake.
2. Open the hinged cover in the load floor in the cargo
area and remove the TIREFIT kit from its storage bin.
Close the load floor cover.
3. Pull the power plug (2) and the TIREFIT sealant hose
(6) out from the TIREFIT kit.
4. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve on the deflated
tire.
5. Screw the fitting at the end of TIREFIT sealant hose (6)
coming from the sealant bottle (5) onto the tire valve.
6. Insert the power plug (2) into the power point on the
instrument panel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
6
368
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
7. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in
PARK and start the engine.
13. Move the shift lever to the PARK position, turn off
the engine, and set the parking brake.
8. Press the switch (3) on the air pump to I (ON). The air
pump should start to inflate the tire and the tire sealant
(white fluid) will flow from the sealant bottle (5) through
the TIREFIT sealant hose (6) and into the tire.
14. Disconnect the air pump hose (1) from the underside
of the sealant bottle (5) by flipping the hose valve open.
9. Allow the air pump to run for five minutes and then
read the pressure gauge (4). If the tire inflates to 26 psi
(1.8 bar) or greater, proceed to Step 19 of this procedure.
If not, proceed to the following step.
10. Press the AIR PUMP switch (3) to 0 (OFF). Then,
disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and place it
back in the vehicle.
11. Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle back
and forth approximately 30 ft (9.1 m) to distribute the
sealant more evenly within the tire.
15. Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and
flip the hose valve closed.
16. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in
PARK and start the engine.
17. Press the switch (3) on the air pump to I (ON). The air
pump should inflate the tire to at least 26 psi (1.8 bar)
within five minutes. If the tire inflates to this level,
proceed to the following step. NOTE: If a tire pressure of
26 psi (1.8 bar) is not obtained within five minutes, the
tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the
vehicle further. Call for assistance.
12. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
369
18. With a tire pressure of no less than 26 psi (1.8 bar)
press the AIR PUMP switch (3) to 0 (OFF) and turn off the
engine. Then, disconnect the TIREFIT system from the
tire and place it back in the vehicle.
proceed to the following step. NOTE: If the pressure is
less than 19 psi (1.3 bar), the tire is too badly damaged.
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
19. Release the parking brake and drive the vehicle for
approximately 10 minutes to ensure optimum distribution of the tire sealant within the tire.
25. Leave the parking brake set and the shift lever in
PARK and start the engine.
20. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
21. Move the shift lever to the PARK position, turn off
the engine, and set the parking brake.
22. Disconnect the air pump hose (1) from the underside
of the sealant bottle (5) by flipping the hose valve open.
23. Connect the air pump hose valve to the tire valve and
flip the hose valve closed.
24. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the pressure
gauge (4). If the pressure is 19 psi (1.3 bar) or greater,
26. Inflate the tire to the pressure indicated on the tire
pressure label on the driver-side latch pillar by pressing
the switch (3) on the air pump to I (ON) and watching the
pressure gauge. When the tire pressure is set to the
pressure indicated on the tire pressure label, press the
AIR PUMP switch (3) to 0 (OFF) and turn off the engine.
27. Disconnect the TIREFIT system from the tire and
reinstall the valve cap.
28. Open the hinged access cover in the load floor in the
cargo area and place the sealant kit back in its storage bin.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
6
370
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Close the load floor cover. Replace the sealant bottle at
your nearest authorized MOPAR威 parts dealership.
• Replace the TIREFIT sealant bottle (5) once every four
years to assure optimum operation of the system.
29. Have the tire inspected at the earliest opportunity at
an authorized dealer or tire service center.
• If TIREFIT is liquid, clean water and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire and wheel
components. Once TIREFIT sealing material has dried,
it can easily be peeled off and properly discarded.
NOTE:
• If a pressure of at least 19 psi (1.3 bar) cannot be
maintained in the tire, the tire is too badly damaged.
Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
• Do not exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until the tire has
been inspected.
• Do not operate the electric air pump for more than
eight minutes to avoid overheating. The air pump may
be used again once it has cooled down.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised.
It can start anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be hurt by the
fan.
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it started. Vehicles
equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way.
Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic converter and once the engine
has started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. If the vehicle
has a discharged battery, booster cables may be used to obtain a start
from another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if done
improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not allow battery fluid to
contact eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean over battery when attaching
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush contaminated area immediately with large quantities
of water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or spark away from the vent holes.
• Do not use a booster battery or any other booster source with an output
that exceeds 12 Volts.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should not be disconnected and should only be replaced with a battery of the same type
(vented).
371
NOTE: The battery is stored under a hinged access
cover in the load floor in the cargo area. Remote battery
terminals are located in the engine compartment for
jump-starting.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watchbands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
2. When boost is provided by a battery in another
vehicle, park that vehicle within booster cable reach, but
do not allow the vehicles to touch one another.
WARNING!
Do not permit vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
6
372
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Set the parking brake, place the automatic transmission in PARK, and turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position on both vehicles.
4. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical loads.
5. Connect one end of the jumper cable to the remote
jump-start positive battery post (+) in the engine compartment. Connect the other end of the same cable to the
positive terminal of the booster battery. Refer to the
following illustration for jump-starting connections.
6. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the engine ground (-)
of the vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure
you have a good contact on the engine ground. Refer to
the following illustration for jump-starting connections.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Jump-Starting
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• You should not try to start your vehicle by pushing
or towing.
• Do not connect the cable to the negative post of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode.
• During cold weather when temperatures are below the freezing point, electrolyte in a discharged
battery may freeze. Do not attempt jump-starting
because the battery could rupture or explode. The
battery temperature must be brought above the
freezing point before attempting jump-start.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery. Let the engine idle a few minutes. Then, start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
373
NOTE: Refer to ⬙Synchronizing ESP⬙ under ⬙Electronic
Stability Program⬙ in Section 5 if the ESP/BAS light (in
the instrument cluster) remains on continuously after
starting the engine of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the above
sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
WARNING!
Any procedure other than above could result in:
• Personal injury caused by electrolyte squirting out
the battery vent
• Personal injury or property damage due to battery
explosion
• Damage to charging system of booster vehicle or
of immobilized vehicle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
6
374
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE and DRIVE. Usually, the least accelerator pedal
pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective.
NOTE: Turn off the Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Program,” or “Traction Control” in Section 5.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by moving between “1st” and REVERSE, do not spin the wheels
faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage
may result.
• Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the
wheels above 35 mph (55 km/h).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 35
mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck, and don’t let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. The only approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flat-bed truck. Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
375
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Flat towing of vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, is only permitted within the following
limitations
With The Ignition Key
Your vehicle may be towed under the following conditions: The shift lever must be in NEUTRAL, the distance
to be traveled must not exceed 30 mi (48 km), and the
towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Exceeding these towing limits may cause a transmission
geartrain failure. If the transmission is not operative or if
the vehicle is to be towed more than 30 mi (48 km), the
vehicle must be transported using a flat-bed truck.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
6
376
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
• Do not attempt to tow this vehicle from the front
with sling type towing equipment. Damage to the
front fascia will result.
• If the transmission is not operative or if the
vehicle is to be towed more than 30 mi (48 km),
then the only approved method of towing is with
a flat-bed truck. Damage to the transmission may
result.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON position,
not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL.
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle With
A Tow Dolly
The manufacturer does not recommend that you tow this
vehicle on a tow dolly. Vehicle damage may occur.
• Do not tow the vehicle from the rear. Damage to
the rear sheet metal and fascia will occur.
• Do not push or tow this vehicle with another
vehicle as damage to the bumper fascia and transmission may result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 6.1L Engine Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . . . 381
▫ Drive Belts — Check Condition And Tension . . 387
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
䡵 Authorized Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
▫ Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
▫ Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
▫ A/C Air Filter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
378
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Power Steering — Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
▫ Front And Rear Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . 394
▫ Steering Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
▫ Windshield Washers/Rear Window Washer . . . 396
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
▫ Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . 402
▫ Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Front And Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Appearance Care And Protection
From Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
▫ Cleaning The Center Console Cupholders . . . . 412
䡵 Fuses (Power Distribution Centers) . . . . . . . . . . 413
▫ Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center) . . . . . 413
▫ Fuses (Rear Power Distribution Center) . . . . . . 415
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
䡵 Replacement Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
▫ Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, And
Park/Turn Light — Models With Halogen
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
▫ Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, And
Park/Turn Light — Models With High Intensity
Discharge Headlights (HID) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Tail/Stop, Turn Signal Light, And
Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
▫ License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
379
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
380
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6.1L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Remote Jump-Start Positive Battery Post
Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center)
Coolant Pressure Cap
Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover
Coolant Bottle
6 — Power Steering Fluid
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Engine Oil Fill
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Washer Fluid Bottle
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
381
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the “MIL” on could cause
further damage to the emissions control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and driveability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions tests
can be performed.
If the “MIL” is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
382
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Loose Fuel Filler Cap
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“Check Gascap” message will display in the Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) (if equipped). If this
occurs, tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap
may also turn on the MIL.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an I/M (Inspection and
Maintenance), this check verifies the MIL is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced or recently had a dead battery or had a battery
replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined
not ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition key or start the engine. This means that
your vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
383
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL is illuminated during
normal vehicle operation, you should have your vehicle
serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station
can fail your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
engine running.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II
system is ready , and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
384
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
AUTHORIZED DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
385
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level in the “SAFE” range. Adding 1.0 qt (1.0L) of
oil when the reading is at the bottom of the “SAFE” range
will result in an oil level at the top of the “SAFE” range
on these engines.
Engine Oil Dipstick
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil aeration or
loss of oil pressure. This could damage your engine.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
386
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 6,000 mi (10 000 km) or six months,
whichever occurs first.
oil viscosity chart. SAE 5W-40 Engine Oil is also allowed
for use in 6.1L Engines. The proper SAE viscosity grade
of engine oil should be selected based on the following
recommendation and be within the operating temperature shown in the engine oil viscosity chart.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends full synthetic engine oils that meet the
American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or
SM/CF, and meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler
Material Standard MS-10725.
The manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic
engine oil, such as Mobil 1威 SAE 0W-40 or equivalent.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 0W-40 engine oil is preferred for use in 6.1L Engines
within the operating temperatures shown in the engine
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended
engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on
engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration in this section.
387
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Materials Added to Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient
service. Mopar威 Engine Oil Filters are a high quality oil
filter and are recommended.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
Belt tension is controlled by means of an automatic
tensioner. Therefore, no belt tension adjustments are
required. However, belt and belt tensioner condition
should be inspected periodically and replaced if required. Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and
failure. Low generator belt tension can cause battery
failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
388
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Inspect belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, glazing, or
frayed cords and replace if there is indication of damage
that could result in belt failure. Also, check belt routing to
make sure there is no interference between the belts and
other engine components. See your authorized dealer for
service.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for engine
air cleaner filter maintenance intervals.
Spark Plugs
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine performance and emissions control. New plugs should be
installed at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Malfunctioning spark plugs can damage the catalytic converter. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the proper type of spark plug for
use in your vehicle.
WARNING!
NOTE: Be sure to follow the “dusty or off-road conditions” maintenance interval if applicable.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause stalling, limit the speed at
which a vehicle can be driven or cause hard starting.
Should an excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the
fuel tank, filter replacement may be necessary. See your
authorized dealer for service.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emissions control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
389
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
390
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may indicate severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this should occur,
safely bring the vehicle to a complete stop, shut the
engine OFF, and allow the vehicle to cool. Thereafter,
obtain service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s
specifications immediately.
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
idling or malfunctioning operating conditions.
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The battery is stored under a hinged access
cover in the load floor in the cargo area. Remote battery
terminals are located in the engine compartment for
jump-starting.
Battery Location
391
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn
or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to contact
your eyes, skin, or clothing. Don’t lean over a battery
when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or on
skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts
of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that should
not be disconnected and should only be replaced with
a battery of the same type (vented).
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
392
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
393
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, and refrigerants.
A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
The filter is located in the fresh air inlet under the hood,
behind a removable panel in the cowl on the passenger
side of the vehicle, next to the windshield wipers. When
installing a new filter, ensure its proper orientation. To
replace the filter, remove the access door in the cowl
screen by pressing the retaining clips. Slide the lid on the
filter adapter forward and down and remove the used
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
394
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
filter. Install the new filter with arrows pointing in the
direction of airflow, which is toward the rear of the
vehicle (text and arrows on the filter indicate this).
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the
recommended air conditioning filter replacement intervals.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer. No chemical flushes should be used in any
power steering system; only the approved lubricant may
be used.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine OFF to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Front and Rear Suspension Ball Joints
The suspension ball joints should be inspected for external leakage or damage when other maintenance is performed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Steering Linkage
The tie rod end ball joints should be inspected for
external leakage or damage when other maintenance is
performed.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including seat tracks,
door hinges, liftgate hinges, and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating,
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism,
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
395
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar威 Lock
Cylinder Lubricant or equivalent directly into the lock
cylinder.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield or rear window. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as engine
oil, gasoline, etc.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
396
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Washers/Rear Window Washer
The windshield washer and the rear window washer
share the same fluid reservoir. The fluid reservoir is
located in the front of the engine compartment. Be sure to
check the fluid level in the reservoir at regular intervals.
Fill the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for a few
seconds to flush out the residual water.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, apply some
washer fluid to a cloth or towel and wipe the wiper
blades clean. This will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
The fluid reservoir will hold 1 gal (4 l) of washer fluid
when the message “Low Washer Fluid” appears in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC).
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
397
Cooling System
WARNING!
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the LOCK position. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any time the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Exhaust Gas” under “Safety Tips” in Section 2.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap when the
radiator is hot.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
398
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed, and refilled with
fresh coolant. Check the front of the A/C condenser for
any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by
gently spraying water from a garden hose vertically
down the face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush, and Refill
The system should be drained, flushed, and refilled at the
intervals shown in the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Selection of Coolant
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended coolant. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct coolant type.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT
engine coolants, may result in engine damage and
may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT
coolant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified coolant as soon as possible.
• Do not use plain water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use
additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based coolants. Use of propylene
glycol-based coolants is not recommended.
399
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to five years or 100,000 mi (160
000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this
extended maintenance period, it is important that you
use the same coolant throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for using Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
When adding coolant:
• The manufacturer recommends using Mopar威
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula
HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology).
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% HOAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are
anticipated.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
400
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce
the amount of corrosion protection in the engine
cooling system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of coolant
and to ensure that coolant will return to the radiator from
the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to
build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while
the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Disposal of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children,
do not store ethylene glycol-based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine OFF and cold, the level of the coolant in the bottle
should be between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
401
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles
(kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
402
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
• If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine, which contains
aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Hoses and Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber.
Pay particular attention to those hoses nearest to high
heat sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose
routing to be sure hoses do not come in contact with any
heat source or moving component, which may cause heat
damage or mechanical wear.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of wear or damage that could cause failure.
Fuel System
The Electronic Fuel Injection high-pressure fuel system’s
hoses and quick connect fittings have unique material
characteristics that provide adequate sealing and resist
attack by deteriorated gasoline.
You are urged to use only the manufacturer’s specified
hoses with quick connect fittings, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing. It
is mandatory to replace any damaged hoses or quick
connect fittings that have been removed during service.
403
Care should be taken with installing quick connect
fittings to ensure they are properly installed and fully
connected. See your authorized dealer for service.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
404
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake and Power Steering Hoses
When the vehicle is serviced for scheduled maintenance,
inspect surface of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence of
heat and mechanical damage. Hard and brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, abrasion, and excessive swelling
indicate deterioration of the rubber. Particular attention
should be made to examining those hose surfaces nearest
to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold.
Ensure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and couplings to make sure they are secure and no leaks are
present.
NOTE:
• Often, fluid such as oil, power steering fluid, and
brake fluid are used during assembly plant operations
to facilitate the assembly of hoses to couplings. Therefore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not
necessarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping
of hot fluid when systems are under pressure (during
vehicle operation), should be noted before a hose is
replaced based on leakage.
• Inspect the brake hoses whenever the brake system is
serviced and at every engine oil change. Inspect hydraulic brake hoses for surface cracking, scuffing, or
worn spots. If there is any evidence of cracking,
scuffing, or worn spots, the hose should be replaced
immediately. Eventual deterioration of the hose can
take place, resulting in a possibility of a burst failure.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Master Cylinder - Brake Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder immediately
if the brake system warning light indicates system failure.
Check the fluid level in the master cylinder when performing underhood services.
Clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing
the cap. Add fluid to bring the level up to the top of the
“FULL” mark on the side of the master cylinder reservoir.
Overfilling of fluid is not recommended because it may
cause leaking in the system.
Add enough fluid to bring the level up to the requirements described on the brake fluid reservoir. With disc
brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall as the brake
pads wear. However, low fluid level may be caused by a
leak and a checkup may be needed.
405
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
WARNING!
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
• Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point, or is unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
406
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Seal damage may result.
• Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or torque
converter shudder. Using a transmission fluid
other than that recommended by the manufacturer
will result in more frequent fluid and filter
changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
Regular automatic transmission fluid level checks are not
required. For this reason, the dipstick is omitted.
If you notice fluid loss or gear shift malfunction, have
your authorized dealer check the transmission fluid level.
• The fluid level is preset at the factory and it does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. If a transmission fluid leak occurs,
visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe
damage to the transmission may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the
fluid level accurately.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid and Filter Changes
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule in Section 8 for the
recommended transmission fluid and filter change intervals.
If the transmission is disassembled for any reason, the
fluid and filter should be changed.
Selection of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transmission to assure optimum transmission performance. Use only manufacturer’s recommended transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type. It is
important that the transmission fluid be maintained at
the prescribed level using the recommended fluid. No
407
chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant may be used.
Special Additives
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the transmission. The only exception to this
policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting fluid
leaks. In addition, avoid using transmission sealers as
they may adversely affect seals.
Front and Rear Wheel Bearings
Front and rear wheel bearings are permanently sealed.
No regular maintenance is required for these components.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
408
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Appearance Care and Protection from Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Protection of Body and Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and chemicals that are sprayed
on trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are
highly corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated,
extreme hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
• Road salt, dirt, and moisture accumulation.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap, and tar.
• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using Mopar威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
409
• Use Mopar威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels, and rear cargo area be kept
clear and open.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder that will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause that destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
410
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Use Mopar威 touch up paint or equivalent on scratches
as soon as possible. Your authorized dealer has touch
up paint to match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels should be cleaned regularly with a
mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use Mopar威
Wheel Cleaner (05066247AB) or equivalent or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush, or metal polishes. Only
Mopar威 or equivalent is recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
Interior Care
Use Mopar威 Fabric Cleaner or equivalent to clean fabric
upholstery and Mopar威 Carpet Cleaner for carpeting.
Interior Trim should be cleaned starting with a damp
cloth, or Mopar威 Satin Select. Do not use harsh cleaners
or Armorall. Use Mopar威 Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
Mopar威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar威 Total Clean or equivalent. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery with any
liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids,
solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
411
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with Mopar威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
scratch the elements.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
directly on the mirror.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
412
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Clean with a wet soft rag or micro-fiber towel. A mild
soap solution may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp rag.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use Mopar威 Total Clean, a mild
soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Cleaning the Center Console Cupholders
Clean with a damp cloth or towel using a mild detergent
with the cupholder in the center console.
NOTE: The cupholder cannot be removed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FUSES (POWER DISTRIBUTION CENTERS)
413
CAUTION!
Fuses (Front Power Distribution Center)
A power distribution center is located in the engine
compartment. This center contains fuses and relays.
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
Front Power Distribution Center
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
414
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
1
Cartridge
Fuse
—
2
—
3
—
4
—
5
6
—
—
7
8
—
—
9
—
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
15 Amp
Blue
25 Amp
Neutral
25 Amp
Neutral
25 Amp
Neutral
—
25 Amp
Neutral
—
25 Amp
Neutral
—
Washer Motor
10
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)
Ignition Run/Start
11
Alternator
13
—
Ignition Coils/Injectors
14
15
—
Starter
16
17
18
19
—
12
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Cartridge
Fuse
30 Amp
Pink
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
50 Amp
Red
—
50 Amp
Red
—
—
—
—
MiniFuse
Description
—
Windshield Wiper
—
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Valves
Radiator Fan
—
—
—
—
Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) Pump Motor
—
Radiator Fan
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
20
21
22
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
—
MiniFuse
Description
—
—
—
—
—
—
415
Fuses (Rear Power Distribution Center)
There is also a power distribution center located under a
hinged access cover in the load floor in the cargo area.
This center contains fuses and relays.
Opening The Access Panel
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
416
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution center
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so
may allow water to get into the power distribution
center and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
Rear Power Distribution Center
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
6
Cartridge
Fuse
60 Amp
Yellow
40 Amp
Green
—
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
—
7
—
1
2
3
4
5
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
—
Ignition Off Draw (IOD)
8
Cartridge
Fuse
—
9
—
10
11 *
12 *
13 *
14
—
—
—
—
—
15
—
—
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
—
—
—
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
—
Heated Seats - if
equipped
20 Amp Fuel Pump
Yellow
20 Amp Sub Amp - if equipped
Yellow
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MiniFuse
417
Description
15 Amp Diagnostic Link ConnecBlue
tor (DLC)/Wireless Control Module (WCM)/
Wireless Ignition Node
(WIN)
20 Amp Power Outlet
Yellow
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
10 Amp AC Heater Control/
Red
Cluster/Security Module - if equipped
20 Amp Trailer Tow Brake ModYellow ule - if equipped
7
418
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
16
Cartridge
Fuse
—
17
—
18
—
19
—
20
—
21
22
23
24
25
—
—
—
—
—
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
—
—
—
—
—
Rear Power Outlet
26
27
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
28
—
29
—
30
—
31
32
33
—
—
—
Cluster
Selectable Power Outlet
Stop Lights
Rear Wiper Motor
—
—
—
—
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MiniFuse
Description
—
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
5 Amp
Orange
—
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Ignition Run
Cluster/Electronic Stability Program (ESP)/
Powertrain Control
Module (PCM)/STOP
LIGHT Switch
10 Amp Door Modules/Power
Red
Mirrors/Steering Control Module (SCM)
—
—
—
—
—
—
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
34
35
Cartridge
Fuse
—
—
36
—
37
—
38
—
39
—
MiniFuse
—
5 Amp
Orange
Description
Cavity
—
Antenna Module - if
equipped/Power Mirrors
20 Amp Hands-Free Phone - if
Yellow equipped/Video Monitor - if equipped/Radio
15 Amp Transmission
Blue
10 Amp Cargo Light/Satellite
Red
Receiver (SDARS) Video
- if equipped/Vehicle
Information Module - if
equipped
10 Amp Heated Mirrors - if
Red
equipped
40
41
42
43
44
Cartridge
Fuse
—
MiniFuse
419
Description
5 Amp
Orange
Auto Inside Rearview
Mirror/Heated Seats - if
equipped/Switch Bank
—
10 Amp AC Heater Control/
Red
Headlights/Tire Pressure Monitoring - if
equipped
30 Amp —
Front Blower Motor
Pink
30 Amp —
Rear Window Defroster
Pink
20 Amp —
Amplifier - if equipped/
Blue
Sunroof - if equipped
* Cavities 11, 12, and 13 contain self-resetting fuses
(circuit breakers) that are only serviceable by an authorized dealer. The cluster and the driver SEAT switch are
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
420
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
fused by the 25-amp circuit breaker in cavity 11. The
passenger SEAT switch is fused by the 25-amp circuit
breaker in cavity 12. The door modules, the driver power
WINDOW switch, and the passenger power WINDOW
switch are fused by the 25-amp circuit breaker in cavity
13. If you experience temporary or permanent loss of
these systems, see your authorized dealer for service.
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you are leaving your vehicle dormant for more than 21
days, you may want to take these steps to protect your
battery.
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
REPLACEMENT LIGHT BULBS
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
Rear Compartment (Liftgate) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Overhead Console Reading Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
Visor Vanity Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A6220
Glove Box Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Door Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Shift Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . JKLE14140
Optional Door Map Pocket / Cupholder
Lighting . . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
NOTE: For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer
for replacement instructions.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the interior bulbs are glass wedge base or glass
cartridge types. Aluminum base bulbs are not approved
and should not be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Exterior
Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
High Beam Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005
Front Park/Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3457AK
Front Fog Light — if equipped . . . . . . . . . . . 9145/H10
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Front Side Marker. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194NA
(Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
Tail/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157KP27/7WK
Turn Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757AP27/7WK
Rear Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3757APY27/7W
Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921/W16W
Center High-Mount Stop Light
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . LED (Serviced at Authorized Dealer)
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
421
BULB REPLACEMENT
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, and
Park/Turn Light — Models with Halogen
Headlights
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise and then pull it out of the headlight assembly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
422
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headlight assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Low Beam Headlight Bulb
High Beam Headlight Bulb
Park/Turn Light Bulb
Outer Park Light Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Low Beam Headlight, High Beam Headlight, and
Park/Turn Light — Models with High Intensity
Discharge Headlights (HID)
High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID
The headlights are a type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the
headlight switch off and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to service a headlight bulb
yourself. If a headlight bulb fails, take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A transient high tension occurs at the bulb sockets of
High Intensity Discharge (HID) headlights when the
headlight switch is turned ON. It may cause serious
electrical shock or electrocution if not serviced properly. See your authorized dealer for service.
423
NOTE: On vehicles equipped with High Intensity Discharge Headlights (HID), when the headlights are turned
on, there is a blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately 10 seconds, as
the system charges.
1. Open the hood.
NOTE: Removal of the air cleaner filter housing may be
necessary prior to replacing bulbs in the headlight assembly on the driver side of the vehicle.
2. Twist the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise and then pull it out of the headlight assembly.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
424
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with an oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the headlight assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Low Beam (HID) Headlight Bulb
High Beam Headlight Bulb
Park/Turn Light Bulb
Outer Park Light Bulb
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
425
5. Remove one wing nut from the back of the tail light
assembly.
Tail/Stop, Turn Signal Light, and Backup Light
1. Open the liftgate.
6. Remove two push pin fasteners under the liftgate with
a flat blade tool.
2. Remove tail light access cover.
7
3. Push the electrical connector locking tab to the side.
4. Disconnect the electrical connector.
7. Pull tail light assembly clear from vehicle to access
bulbs.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
426
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Turn the appropriate bulb and socket assembly counterclockwise to remove it from the tail light assembly.
2 — Turn Signal Light Bulb
1 — Tail/Stop Light Bulb
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
427
9. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
10. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly into the tail
light assembly, and then turn it clockwise.
11. Reinstall the tail light assembly, fasteners, and electrical connector.
12. Close the liftgate.
3 — Backup Light Bulb
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
428
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
License Light
1. Remove the screws securing the light to the rear fascia.
2. Remove the bulb and socket assembly.
3. Disconnect the bulb from the socket assembly and
install the replacement bulb.
1 — License Light Bulb
2 — Socket
4. Reinstall the bulb and socket assembly.
5. Reattach the light to the rear fascia, and then install the
screws.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
429
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (approximate)
6.1 Liter Engine
19 gal
72 l
Engine Oil with Filter
6.1 Liter Engine (SAE 0W-40)
7 qts
6.6 liters
Cooling System *
6.1 Liter Engine (Mopar威
15.2 qts
14.4 l
Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/
100,000 Mile Formula) or
equivalent
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to
MAX level.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
7
430
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil (6.1L)
Oil Filter (6.1L)
Spark Plugs (6.1L)
Fuel Selection (6.1L)
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating
conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils that
meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SM or SM/CF, and
meet the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-10725. The
manufacturer recommends the use of a full synthetic engine oil, such as Mobil 1威 SAE 0W-40 or equivalent. For additional information, refer to the “Engine Oil Selection” and “Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)” in the “Maintenance Procedures” section of this manual.
Mopar威 05281090 or equivalent
PLZTR5A-13 (Gap.050 in [1.27 mm])
Premium Unleaded 91 Octane Only or higher
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
431
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Rear Axle
Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts
Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
Mopar威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids.
Mopar威 Power Steering Fluid + 4, Mopar威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission
Fluid
API GL-5 SAE 75W140 Synthetic Gear Lubricant or equivalent
7
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . 434
▫ Severe Duty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . 437 C
S
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
434
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services, listed in bold type
, must be done at the times or mileages specified to
ensure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service should also be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emission control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
To help you have the best driving experience possible,
the manufacturer has identified the specific vehicle maintenance service intervals that are required to keep your
vehicle operating properly and safely.
Chrysler recommends that these maintenance intervals
be performed at your selling dealer. The technicians at
your dealership know your vehicle best, and have access
to factory-trained information, genuine Mopar威 parts,
and specially designed electronic and mechanical tools
that can help prevent future costly repairs.
The maintenance intervals shown should be performed
as indicated in this section.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 6,000 mi (10,000 km) or six months,
whichever comes first.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
At Each Stop for Fuel
• Check the engine oil level. Refer to “Engine Oil” under
“Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7.
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
435 M
At Each Oil Change
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
Once a Month
• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Inspect the battery, and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
A
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct I
N
operation.
T
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir and brake
master cylinder, and add as needed.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
436
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Severe Duty
If your vehicle is operated under the Severe Duty conditions listed below change your engine oil and filter every
3,000 mi (5 000 km) or three months as indicated in the
Maintenance Schedule.
• Stop and go driving.
• Short trips of less than 10 mi (16 km).
• Trailer towing.
• Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial service).
• Off-road or desert operation.
• Driving in dusty conditions.
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
437 M
Required Maintenance Intervals
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if using
your vehicle under any of these severe duty conditions: Short trips, stop and go driving, dusty or offroad conditions, police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing.
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter if your vehicle is NOT operated under any of the conditions
listed under Severe Duty.
Rotate the tires.
If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions,
inspect the engine air cleaner filter, and replace if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, and replace if necessary.
Miles
Kilometers
or Months
3,000
5 000
3
or
or
or
6,000
10 000
6
6,000
10 000
6
12,000
20 000
12
12,000
20 000
12
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 438 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N
T
E
N Maintenance Items
A
N Replace the air conditioning filter (if equipped).
C Inspect the rear axle fluid.
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at
12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months.
Inspect the exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 mi (20 000 km) or 12 months.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot
seals, and replace if necessary.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Change the rear axle fluid if using your vehicle for
any of the following: police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or frequent trailer towing.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if
using your vehicle for any of the following: police,
taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
Miles
12,000
18,000
Kilometers
20 000
30 000
or Months
12
18
24,000
40 000
24
24,000
40 000
24
24,000
40 000
24
30,000
50 000
30
48,000
80 000
48
60,000
100 000
60
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
439 M
Perform Maintenance Every (Where time and mileage
are listed, follow the interval that occurs first.)
Maintenance Items
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
Flush and replace the engine coolant.
Replace the spark plugs.
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Miles
90,000
102,000
102,000
120,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
Kilometers
150 000
170 000
170 000
200 000
or Months
90
60
102
120
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For
Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . . 446
䡵 If You Need Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
䡵 Mopar威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
▫ DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
▫ DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc.
Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
▫ In The 50 United States And
ashington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
9
442
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
443
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take your vehicle to
your authorized selling dealer. They know you and your
vehicle best, and are most concerned that you get prompt
and high quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized
dealers have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
9
444
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
special tools, and the latest information to ensure your
vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to your authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If your authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer
Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico: (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico: (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance for the Hearing or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected repairs after your manufacturer’s New Vehicle
Limited Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
445
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer
to your contract documents, and contact the person listed
in those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your vehicle. Your authorized
dealer has also made a major investment in facilities,
tools, and training to assure that you are absolutely
delighted with your ownership experience. You’ll be
pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
issues or related concerns.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
9
446
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of DaimlerChrysler’s warranties applicable to
this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your authorized dealer. They will help
you keep your vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
447
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written
in straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
9
448
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Call toll free at:
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures as well as
specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com
• www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear 1-1/2 times as
well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The
relative performance of tires depends upon the actual
conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices, and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
449
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
9
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
450
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INDEX
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
452
INDEX
About Your Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295,297
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,301
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 399
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Adding Rear Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,270,396
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 388
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,260
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267,393
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392,393
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258,260,392
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182,317
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55,58
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,61,76,178
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,56
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,56
Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,181
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 398,399,429
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,301
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,299
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Anti-Theft System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Arming Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . 18
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INDEX
Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,225
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Auto Up Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28,29
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . 260
Automatic Transaxle
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285,406,407
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407,431
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,290
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
453
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode . . 289,290
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288,290
Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Axle Lubrication (Axle Fluid) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Emergency Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 23
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,391
Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Belts, Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,76
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
10
454
INDEX
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,403
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,301
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405,431
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,297
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297,403
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 73
Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420,421
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,420
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,340
Cargo Compartment
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Cargo Management System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Cargo Organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Rollaway Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Tri-Fold Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Waterproof Liner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Cargo (Vehicle Loading) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158,344
Catalytic Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
CD (Compact Disc) Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,225
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,225,226
Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INDEX
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,65,69,70
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,69
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207,210,226,231
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
455
Computer, Trip/Travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) . . . . . . . . . 251
Console, Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Converter, Catalytic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 400
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398,401
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
10
456
INDEX
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . 398,429,430
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155,412
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Daytime Brightness, Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,259,265
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,269
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Digital Video Disc (DVD) Player . . . . . . . . . . 205,225
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Drive Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
DVD Player (Video Entertainment System) . . . . . . 247
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Electronic Power Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . 413
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 138
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INDEX
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . 176
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 185
Emergency, In Case of
Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 382,434
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398,430
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,74,340
457
Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385,429,430
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Oil Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386,429
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 60
Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,74,75,340,397
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
10
458
INDEX
Exhaust
Exterior
Exterior
Exterior
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,396
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267,393
Engine Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387,430
Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,130,177
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Floor Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 430
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,179
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Front Suspension Ball Joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Front Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INDEX
459
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,430
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Fuel System Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,24,113,291,337
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344,348
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344,347
Ground Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,382
Hands-Free Phone (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . 87,225,226
Hard Drive (HDD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,225
10
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
460
INDEX
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 130
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,134
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . 130
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Holder, Coin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Holder, Cup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter . . . 143
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402,403
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,14
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64
Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INDEX
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174,175
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . 133,269
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Key, Programming . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer)
Key-In Reminder . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Knee Bolster . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . 17
. . 16
. . 15
. . 15
. . 20
. . 12
48,49
461
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether
for CHildren) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,69
Latch Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . 269,396
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,420
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,126
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56,61,76,178
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184,299
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180,297
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
10
462
INDEX
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420,421
Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,142
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,130
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . 307
Electronic Throttle Control Warning . . . . . . . . . 176
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129,179
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,423
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Headlights On With Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,134
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,179
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126,175
Intensity Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,142
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Low Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 184
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,142
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness) . . . . . . . . . . 132
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,142
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420,421
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 184
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . 182,327
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,129,130,177
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INDEX
Vanity Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 175
Load Leveling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344,345
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
(LATCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67,69
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
463
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Maintenance, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Maintenance, Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 184,382
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,142
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Electric Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
10
464
INDEX
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384,446
MP3 Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,225
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Navigation Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . 337,430
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385,430
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387,430
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386,429
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386,429
Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381,382
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Overhead Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . 447
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INDEX
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Parking On Hill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87,225,226
Phone, Hands-Free (UConnect™) . . . . . . . . 87,225,226
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 312
Port
Universal Serial Bus (USB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,225
USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,225
Power
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
465
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 153
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Steering, Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394,431
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Programming Transmitters
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . 400
Radio Broadcast Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Radio, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206,226,257
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
10
466
INDEX
Radio Remote Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Radio, Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,206,225,226,242,247
Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,225
Rear Cup Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Rear Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Rear Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Reception, Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Reclining Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Remote Control
Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 255
Remote Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Restraint, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Rocking Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Roof Rack (Luggage Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INDEX
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37,74
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,206,225,226,242,247
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38,39,76
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 44
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63,64,65,70
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39,40
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
467
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Height Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,181
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 398,430
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
10
468
INDEX
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207,210,226,231
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,285
Shoulder Belt Upper Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,56
Side Curtain (Window Airbag) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77,130,177
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,225
Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388,430
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24,277
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Emergency (Jump Starting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Starting and Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Column Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299,394
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INDEX
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157,420
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267,420
Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Sunglasses Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 48
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
System, Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . 260
469
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . 176,177,365
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Time Delay, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Tip Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 312
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
TIREFIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,316,448
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
10
470
INDEX
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312,313
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308,316
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motor Home . . . . . . . . . 361
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281,285,406
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INDEX
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 143
Transmitter Programming
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . 20
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130,177
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
UConnect™ (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . 87,225
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . 251
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Port . . . . . . . . . . . 205,225
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
471
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
USB Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205,225
Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313,344,345
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267,420
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Video Entertainment System
(Rear Seat Video System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Warning Flasher, Hazard
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
10
472
INDEX
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135,270,396
Washer, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,134,396
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Wheel Alignment and Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Wheel Bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,152
Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50,56
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76,259,265
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132,134,396
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Wiper, Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,269
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,395
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133,269
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ov
i
dedby:
2008 Magnum SRT8
2008
OWNER’ S MANUAL
81-226-0822
First Edition
I
nf
or
mat
i
onPr
ovi
dedby
:
Printed in U.S.A.
Magnum SRT8
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement